126
B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 15 REGULATIONS 2015 PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108 2. SCS1102 3. SEC1101 4. SEE1106 5. SEE1202 6. SEE1204 SEMESTER I COURSE TITLE Engineering Mathematics I Fundamentals of Programming Electronic Devices Circuit Theory & Network Analysis Electromagnetic Theory DC Machines & Transformers L 3 3 3 3 3 3 T 1 0 0 1 0 0 P 0 0 0 0 0 0 C 4 3 3 4 3 3 PAGE No. 1 3 7 33 35 37 20 TOTAL CREDITS Sl. No. COURSE CODE SEMESTER 2 COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No. 1. SMT1109 Engineering Mathematics II 3 1 0 4 2 2. SCS1202 Object Oriented Programming 3 0 0 3 4 3. SEC1203 Electronic Circuits 3 0 0 3 9 4. SEE1205 AC Machines 3 0 0 3 38 PRACTICALS Electrical Circuits and Electronic Devices lab 0 0 4 2 54 5. SEC4052 6. SEE4058 Electrical Machines lab 0 0 4 2 54 TOTAL CREDITS 17 Sl. No. COURSE CODE SEMESTER 3 COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No. 1. SIC1203 Measurements and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 49 2. SEC1207 Digital Logic Circuits 3 0 0 3 12 3. SEC1302 Analog Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 18 4. SEE1203 Control Systems 3 1 0 4 36 5. SEE1206 Transmission and Distribution 3 1 0 4 39 6. SEE1307 Special Electrical Machines 3 0 0 3 46 TOTAL CREDITS 20 L - LECTURE HOURS, T TUTORIAL HOURS, P PRACTICAL HOURS, C CREDITS

PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 15 REGULATIONS 2015

PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E )

ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

CURRICULUM

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

1. SMT1108

2. SCS1102

3. SEC1101

4. SEE1106

5. SEE1202

6. SEE1204

SEMESTER I

COURSE TITLE

Engineering Mathematics I

Fundamentals of Programming

Electronic Devices

Circuit Theory & Network Analysis

Electromagnetic Theory

DC Machines & Transformers

L

3

3

3

3

3

3

T

1

0

0

1

0

0

P

0

0

0

0

0

0

C

4

3

3

4

3

3

PAGE No.

1

3

7

33

35

37

20 TOTAL CREDITS

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER 2

COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SMT1109 Engineering Mathematics II 3 1 0 4 2

2. SCS1202 Object Oriented Programming 3 0 0 3 4

3. SEC1203 Electronic Circuits 3 0 0 3 9

4. SEE1205 AC Machines 3 0 0 3 38

PRACTICALS

Electrical Circuits and Electronic Devices lab 0 0 4 2 54 5. SEC4052

6. SEE4058 Electrical Machines lab 0 0 4 2 54

TOTAL CREDITS 17

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER 3

COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SIC1203 Measurements and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 49

2. SEC1207 Digital Logic Circuits 3 0 0 3 12

3. SEC1302 Analog Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 18

4. SEE1203 Control Systems 3 1 0 4 36

5. SEE1206 Transmission and Distribution 3 1 0 4 39

6. SEE1307 Special Electrical Machines 3 0 0 3 46

TOTAL CREDITS 20

L - LECTURE HOURS, T – TUTORIAL HOURS, P – PRACTICAL HOURS, C – CREDITS

Page 2: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 16 REGULATIONS 2015

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

S E M E S T E R 4

COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SEC1310 Microprocessor Interfacing and its Applications 3 0 0 3 21

2. SEE1301 Advanced Control Systems 3 1 0 4 40

3. SEE1303 Power Generation and Utilization 3 0 0 3 42

4. SEE1304 Electrical Machine Design 3 1 0 4 43

PRACTICALS

Electronic Circuits and LDIC lab 0 0 4 2 53 5. SEC4092

6. SEC4068 Microprocessor Lab 0 0 4 2 52

TOTAL CREDITS 18

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

1. SBA1101

2. SEC1315

3. SEC1317

4. SEC1609

5. SEE1302

6. SEE1305

S E M E S T E R 5

COURSE TITLE

Principles of Management and Professional Ethics

Digital Signal Processing & Its Applications

Principles of Embedded System

L

3

3

3

T

0

0

0

0

1

0

P

0

0

0

0

0

0

C

3

3

3

3

4

3

PAGE No .

6

24

26

32

41

44

19

Fundamentals of Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks 3

Power System Analysis

Power Electronics

3

3

TOTAL CREDITS

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

S E M E S T E R 6

COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SEE1306 Electric Drives and Control 3 0 0 3 45

2. SEE1401 Power System Protection and Switchgear 3 0 0 3 47

3. Elective – I 3 0 0 3

4. Elective – II 3 0 0 3

PRACTICALS

Power Systems lab 0 0 4 2 55 5. SEE4056

6. SEE4057 Power Electronics Lab 0 0 4 2 55

4. Project Work Phase - 1

TOTAL CREDITS 16

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

S E M E S T E R 7

COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SEE1402 High Voltage Engineering 3 0 0 3 48

2. Elective – III 3 0 0 3

3. Elective – IV 3 0 0 3

Page 3: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 17 REGULATIONS 2015

PRACTICALS

4. S13PROJ1 Project Work (Phase - 1 & 2)

TOTAL CREDITS

ELECTIVE COURSES (GROUP A)

0 0 20 10

TOTAL CREDITS 19

FOR THE PROGRAM : 129

Sl. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SEC1304 Fundamentals of Communication Engineering 3 0 0 3 56

2. SEC1316 CMOS VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 25

3. SEC1402 Programming in HDL 3 0 0 3 60

4. SEC1602 ASIC Design 3 0 0 3 63

5. SEE1601 Flexible AC Transmission System 3 0 0 3 77

6. SEE1602 Power System Dynamics 3 0 0 3 78

7. SEE1603 Power System Operation and Control. 3 0 0 3 79

8. SEE1604 EHV AC and DC Transmission 3 0 0 3 80

9. SEE1605 Power System Restructuring and Deregulation 3 0 0 3 81

10. SEE1606 Static Relays 3 0 0 3 82

11. SEE1607 Renewable Electric Systems 3 0 0 3 83

12. SEE1608 Computer Aided Design 3 0 0 3 84

13. SEE1609 Computer Aided Design of Electrical Equipment 3 0 0 3 85

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

ELECTIVE COURSES (GROUP B)

COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SEC1606 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 66

2. SEC1607 Digital Control Systems 3 0 0 3 89

3. SEC1617 Advanced Electronic Test Engineering 3 0 0 3 73

4. SEC1618 Programming in MATLAB 3 0 0 3 74

5. SIC1310 Theory of Robotics 3 0 0 3 86

6. SIC1311 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 87

7. SIC1605 Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 88

8. SIC1608 Power Plant Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 90

9. SIC1611 Fundamentals of Mechatronics 3 0 0 3 91

10. SPR1307 Resource Management Techniques 3 0 0 3 92

Page 4: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 18 REGULATIONS 2015

ELECTIVES

Sl. No. COURSE CODE TITLE L T P C Page No.

1. SBI 1101 Introduction to Bioinformatics 3 0 0 3 93

2. SBI 1605 Python 3 0 0 3 94

3. SBM 1304 Biomaterials 3 0 0 3 95

4. SBM 1404 Hospital Management 3 0 0 3 96

5. SBM 1606 Biomems and Nanotechnology 3 0 0 3 97

6. SBI 1207 PERL Programming 3 0 0 3 98

7. SBT1610 GMP and Quality Concepts 3 0 0 3 99

8. SBT 1611 Biology for Engineers 3 0 0 3 100

9. SCH 1616 Environmental Impact Assessment 3 0 0 3 101

10. SCI 1619 Disaster Management 3 0 0 3 102

11. SCS 1302 Computer Graphics and Multimedia Systems 3 0 0 3 103

12. SCY 1601 Spectroscopy 3 0 0 3 104

13. SCY 1602 Energy Sources 3 0 0 3 105

14. SHS 1601 Life and Employability Skills 3 0 0 3 106

15. SHS 1602 Technical Writing for Scientists 3 0 0 3 107

16. SHS 1603 Professional Communication & Advanced Rhetoric 3 0 0 3 108

17. SIT 1402 Mobile Application Development 3 0 0 3 109

18. SIT 1606 Big Data 3 0 0 3 110

19. SIT 1608 Green Computing 3 0 0 3 111

20. SIT 1609 Game Programming 3 0 0 3 112

21. SPH 1601 Energy Physics 3 0 0 3 113

22. SPH 1602 Geophysics 3 0 0 3 114

23. SPH 1603 Space Physics 3 0 0 3 115

24. SPH 1604 Astrophysics 3 0 0 3 116

25. SPH 1605 Atomic and Nuclear Physics 3 0 0 3 117

Page 5: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 19 REGULATIONS 2015

SMT1108 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I

(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering)

L T P Credits Total Marks

3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The ability to identify, reflect upon, evaluate and apply different types of information and knowledge to form independent judgements. Analytical, logical thinking and conclusions based on quantitative information will be the main objective of learning this subject.

UNIT 1 COMPLEX VARIABLES 11 Hrs.

Analytic functions – Cauchy- Riemann equations in cartesian and polar form – Harmonic functions - properties of analytic functions – Construction of analytic functions using Milne – Thompson method – Bilinear transformation.

UNIT 2 COMPLEX INTEGRATION 11 Hrs. Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula – problems - Taylor’s and Laurent’s series – Singularities – Poles and Residues – Cauchy’s residue theorem and problems.

UNIT 3 FOURIER SERIES 13 Hrs.

Definition- Dirichlets conditions- coefficients- Fourier series for the function defined in [c, c+2π],[c, c+2l] – Parseval’s identity ( without proof) – Half range cosine series and sine series of f(x) defined in [0,π],[0,l] - simple problems – Harmonic Analysis.

UNIT 4 FOURIER TRANSFORMS 11 Hrs. The infinite Fourier transform – Sine and Cosine transform – Properties – Inversion theorem – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity – Finite Fourier sine and cosine transform.

UNIT 5 LAPLACE TRANSFORM 14 Hrs.

Laplace transform – Transforms of standard functions – properties– Transforms of derivatives and integrals – Transforms of the type eatf(t), tf(t), f(t)/t - Transform of periodic functions – Transform of unit step function and impulse function - Inverse Laplace transforms – Convolution theorem – Initial and final value theorems

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, (8th Edition), John Wiley and Sons (Asia)Pte Ltd., Singapore, 2001.

2. Grewal,B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1999.

3. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K., and Gunavathy, K., Engineering Mathematics, (4th Revised Edition), S.Chand&Co., New Delhi, 2001.

4. Veerarajan,T., Engineering Mathematics, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co., NewDelhi, 1999

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 2 Questions from each unit, each carrying 2 marks 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 12 marks 60 Marks

Page 6: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 20 REGULATIONS 2015

SMT1109 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II

(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering) L T P Credits Total Marks

3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE The ability to identify, reflect upon, evaluate and apply different types of information and knowledge to form

independent judgements. Analytical, logical thinking and conclusions based on quantitative information will be the main objective of learning this subject.

UNIT 1 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 13 Hrs.

Formation of equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions – Solutions of PDE – general, particular and complete integrals – Solutions of First order Linear PDE ( Lagrange’s linear equation ) – Solution of Linear Homogeneous PDE of higher order with constant coefficients.

UNIT 2 APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 13 Hrs.

One dimensional wave equation – Transverse vibrating of finite elastic string with fixed ends- Boundary and initial value problems – Fourier solution – one dimensional heat equation – steady state problems with zero boundary conditions- Two dimensional heat equation – steady state heat flow in two dimensions- Laplace equation in Cartesian form( No derivations required).

UNIT 3 ALGEBRAIC AND TRANSCENDENTAL EQUATIONS 11 Hrs. Solution of Algebraic equation by Regula Falsi Method , Newton Raphson Method – Solution of simultaneous linear algebraic equations – Gauss Elimination Method , Gauss Jacobi & Gauss Seidel Method.

UNIT 4 INTERPOLATION , NUMERICAL DIFFERENTATION & INTEGRATION 11 Hrs.

Interpolation- Newton forward and backward interpolation formula- Lagranges formula for unequal intervals-Numerical differentiation- Newton’s forward and backward differences to compute first and second derivatives-Numerical integration – Trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s one third rule and three eighth rule.

UNIT 5 NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS 12 Hrs.

Ordinary differential equations – Taylor series method – Runge Kutta method for fourth order- Partial differential equations – Finite differences – Laplace equation and its solutions by Liebmann’s process- Solution of Poisson equation – Solutions of parabolic equations by Bender Schmidt Method – Solution of hyperbolic equations.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, (8th Edition), John Wiley and Sons (Asia)Pte Ltd., Singapore, 2001.

2. Grewal,B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1999.

3. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K., and Gunavathy, K., Engineering Mathematics, (4th Edition), S.Chand&Co., New Delhi, 2001.

4. Kandaswamy P & Co., Numerical Methods, S.Chand Publications, Chennai 2009.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 2 Questions from each unit, each carrying 2 marks 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 12 marks 60 Marks

Page 7: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 21 REGULATIONS 2015

SCS1102 FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL Branches of B.E/ B. Tech.) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE Objectives To understand the basic programming concepts. To understand the concept of arrays, functions and pointers. To gain knowledge about memory management.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

Introduction: Algorithms, Pseudocodes & flowcharts, Overview of C, features of C, Structure of C program, Compilation & execution of C program. Identifiers, variables, expression, keywords, data types, constants, scope and life of variables, and local and global variables. Operators: arithmetic, logical, relational, conditional and bitwise operators. Special operators: sizeof () & comma (,) operator. Precedence and associativity of operators & Type conversion in expressions.

Basic input/output and library functions: Single character input/output i.e. getch(), getchar(), getche() & putchar(). Formatted input/output: printf() and scanf().

UNIT 2 CONTROL STRUCTURES AND FUNCTIONS 9 Hrs.

Control structures: Conditional control (if, nested if, switch case), Loop control (for, while, do while) and Unconditional control structures (goto)

Functions: The Need of a function, user defined and library function, prototype of a function, calling of a function, function argument, passing arguments to function, return values, nesting of function, recursion. Library Functions: Concepts, mathematical and string functions.

UNIT 3 ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9 Hrs.

Arrays: Single and multidimensional arrays, array declaration and initialization of arrays, array as function arguments.

Strings: Declaration, initialization and string handling functions. Structure and Union: Defining structure, declaration of structure variable, accessing structure members, nested

structures, array of structures, structure assignment, structure as function argument, function that returns structure, union.

UNIT 4 STORAGE CLASSES AND POINTERS 9 Hrs.

Storage class specifier - auto, extern, static & register, Pointers: The ‘&’ and ’*’ operators, pointers expressions, pointers vs arrays

UNIT 5 MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs.

Pointer to functions, Function returning pointers Direct Memory Access functions: malloc(), calloc(), sizeof(), free() and realloc(). Preprocessor directives.

Command line arguments

Max. 45 hours TEXT / REFERENCE books 1. Balaguruswami. E., “Programming in C”, TMH Publications,1997

2. Yashavant P. Kanetkar., “Let us C”, Fifth Edition

3. Gottfried , “Programming with C”, Schaums Outline Series, TMH publications,1997 4. Mahapatra , “Thinking in C”, PHI publications,2nd Edition.

5. Subburaj . R , “Programming in C” , Vikas Publishing, First Edition, 2000

END SEMESTER exam question paper pattern Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 12 marks 60 Marks

Page 8: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 22 REGULATIONS 2015

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

SCS1202 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL Branches of B.E/ B. Tech.) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE ObjectiveS To understand the fundamental concepts of object oriented programming. Be familiar with concepts like abstraction, inheritance, polymorphism. To understand the concept of Classes.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs. Object Oriented Programming Paradigms - Comparison of Programming Paradigms - Object Oriented

Languages - Benefits of Object Oriented Programming - Comparison with C - Overview of C++ -Pointers- Functions - Scope and Namespaces - Source Files and Programs.

UNIT 2 CLASSES AND OBJECTS 9 Hrs. Working with classes - Classes and objects - Class specification-Class objects-Accessing class

members-Defining class members-Inline functions-Accessing member functions within class-Data hiding-Class member accessibility-Empty classes,

UNIT 3 CONSTRUCTORS AND OVERLOADING 9 Hrs.

Default constructors-Parameterized constructors-Constructor overloading-Copy constructors-new, delete operators-”this” pointer-friend classes and friend functions-Function overloading- Unary Operator overloading -Binary Operator overloading.

UNIT 4 INHERITANCE 9 Hrs. Base class and derived class relationship-Derived class declaration-Forms of inheritance-Inheritance and

member accessibility- Constructors in derived class-Destructors in derived class-Multiple inheritance-Multi level inheritance-Hybrid inheritance-Virtual base classes-Member function overriding-Virtual functions-Abstract classes-Pure Virtual functions.

UNIT 5 I/O AND LIBRARY ORGANIZATION 9 Hrs. I/O Stream - File I/O - Exception Handling - Templates - STL - Library Organization and Containers - Standard Containers - Overview of Standard Algorithms-Iterators and Allocators.

Max. 45 hours

TEXT / REFERENCE books

6. Balagurusamy, ”Object Oriented Programming with C++”, Tata McGraw Hill,4th Edition,2010

7. Venu Gopal.K.R, Ravishankar.T, and Raj kumar, ”Mastering C++”, Tata McGraw Hill,1999.

8. Bjarne Stroustrup, ”The C++ programming language”, Addision Wesley, 3rd Edition,1998.

9. John R Hubbard, “Programming with C++”, Schaums Outline Series, McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2009.

10. James Martin & James J.Odell,”Object Oriented methods-A foundation”,Prentice Hall,1997.

END SEMESTER exam question paper pattern Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 9: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 23 REGULATIONS 2015

COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND L T P Credits Total Marks

SCS1315 OPERATING SYSTEM 3 0 0 3 100

(For ECE and EIE)

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the organization of a computer, and the hardware-software interface. To know about the various components of a computer and their internals. To have an overview of operating system and its functionality

UNIT 1 Introduction 9 Hrs. Central Processing Unit - Introduction - General Register Organization - Stack organization -- Basic computer

Organization - Computer Registers - Computer Instructions - Instruction Cycle. Arithmetic ,Logic, Shift Microoperations- Arithmetic Logic Shift Unit -Example Architectures: MIPS, Power PC,RISC,CISC

UNIT 2 Control unit design and multiprocessors 9 Hrs.

Microprogrammed Control : Control memory - address sequencing - Microprogram Example- Design of Control unit -Example Processor design Multiprocessors: Characteristics- Interprocessor Arbitration- Interprocessor Communication

UNIT 3 Memory and I/O System 9 Hrs. Memory Organization : Memory Hierarchy - Main memory - auxiliary Memory - Associative Memory - Cache Memory - Virtual memory

Input - Output Organization : Peripheral Devices - I/O Interface, Modes of transfer - Priority Interrupt - DMA - IOP - Serial Communication

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Introduction - Operating system structures - System components - OS services

Process Management: Processes - Process concepts - Process schedulling-- CPU schedulling Scheduling algorithms - Preemptive strategies - Non-preemptive strategies.

UNIT 5 DEADLOCKS AND MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs.

`The critical section problem - Semaphores - Deadlocks - Deadlock characterization - Prevention - Avoidance - Detection - Recovery. Storage Management Strategies - Contiguous vs. non-contiguous storage allocation- Paging - Segmentation - Paging/Segmentation systems - Page replacement strategies

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. M.Morris Mano, ;Computer System Architecture”,Prentice-Hall Publishers,Third Edition.

2. John P Hayes , ‘Computer Architecture and Organization’, McGraw Hill international edition, Third Edition.

3. Kai Hwang and Faye A Briggs ,‘Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing’, McGraw Hill international edition,1995.

4. Abraham Silberschatz,Peter Galvin and Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, 6t h Edition, Addison Wesley, 2002.

5. Harvey M.Deitel, ”Operating System”, 2n d Edition, Addison Wesley, 2000.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each- No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 10: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 24 REGULATIONS 2015

SBA1101 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT AND PROFESSIONAL L T P Credits Total Marks

ETHICS 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To familiarize engineering students with the concepts of Management useful for Managing their own enterprise

or to work in a professional organization in Managerial capacity and to provide them an ethical outlook.

UNIT 1 MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS & STRUCTURE 9 Hrs.

Management - Definition -Role of managers- Levels of management-Basic Function - Contribution of Taylor & Fayol. Types of structures - Line, staff, Functional, Committee and Project & Matrix - Structures. Departmentalization - Centralization - Decentralization - Span of control. Management by Objectives (MBO)- Management by Exception (MBE).

UNIT 2 MANAGEMENT OF ORGINASATION 9 Hrs.

Forms of Business / Industrial Ownership - Sole Trader, Partnership, Joint stock Company, Performance Appraisal - Basic Principles - Pitfalls - Methods to Overcome. Industrial Safety - Causes of Accidents - Cost of Accidents - Measures to avoid Accidents. Plant Layout & Maintenance - Need, Types & Managerial Aspects.

UNIT 3 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9 Hrs.

Organisational Behaviour - Definition - Nature & Scope - Contributing Disciplines - Importance of OB to Managers. Personality - Definition - Theories - Factors Influencing Personality. Motivation - Definition - Theories. Transactional Analysis. Morale & Job Satisfaction - Factors Influencing Job Satisfaction.

UNIT 4 GROUP DYNAMICS 9 Hrs.

Group - Definition - Types - Determinants of Group Cohesiveness. Communication - Process - Barriers - Effective Communication. Leadership-Definition- leadership styles- Theories of leadership - Factors Contributing to Effective Leadership. Trade Unions- Role of Trade Union in Organizations - Types and Functions of Trade Unions.

UNIT 5 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 9 Hrs.

Ethics in Workplace - Formulation of Ethics - Managerial Ethics - Managing Ethical Behaviour - Codes of Ethics - Encouraging Ethical Behaviour - Ethical Leadership - Ethical Decision making. Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) - Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)- Meaning- Laws relating to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gupta C.B., “Management Theory and Practice”, 14th Edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2009.

2. Dr. Prasad L.M., “Principle & Practice of Management”, 7th Edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2008.

3. Aswathappa, “Organisational Behaviour”, 8th Edition, Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.

4. Dr. Prasad L.M., “Organisational Behaviour”, 4th Edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2008.

5. Harold Koontz, “Principles of Management”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 11: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 25 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1101 ELECTRONIC DEVICES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE, E&C, EEE, ETCE, CSE and IT) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquaint the students with the construction, theory and operation of the basic electronic devices such as PN

junction diode, Bipolar and Field effect Transistors, special semiconductor devices and oscilloscopes. On completion of this course the student will recognize

Acquire knowledge about the semiconductor diodes Acquire knowledge about Transistors Acquire knowledge about Oscilloscopes

UNIT 1 SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES 9 Hrs. Intrinsic and Extrinsic semiconductor - Charge density, Mobility and Conductivity in Semiconductor, Drift and

diffusion current, Continuity equation, PN junction - Energy band diagram of PN junction, Current components in PN junction, Junction capacitance - Application of diode - Diode switch, Clipper, Clamper and Voltage multipliers - Zener diode - Zener voltage regulators.

UNIT 2 BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR 9 Hrs. Construction and Operation of NPN and PNP transistor - Current components in a transistor, Eber moll’s

Equation-Characteristics of CE,CB,CC configuration - Base width modulation, Transistor breakdown, Transistor biasing - Bias Stabilization and Compensation, Thermal runaway problems, Heat sinks, Switching characteristics.

UNIT 3 FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR 9 Hrs. JFET- Construction, Operation and Characteristics, Expression for pinch off voltage and drain current -

MOSFET- Enhancement and Depletion mode operation and characteristics, Handling precautions of MOSFET, Gate capacitance- FET as VVR - Comparison of MOSFET and JFET - Comparison of BJT and JFET.

UNIT 4 SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9 Hrs. SCR- UJT- Diac- Triac - Schotty barrier diode-Varactor diode - PIN diode - Tunnel diode - Gunn diode - Laser diode-Operation, Characteristics and Applications.

UNIT 5 PRINCIPLES OF CRT 9 Hrs. Force on charged particle in electric field and magnetic field - Motion of charged particle in electric and

magnetic field -Oscilloscopes-Features and uses, Types and models-CRO,Dual beam oscilloscope, Analog Oscilloscope, Digital oscilloscope Principles of CRT - Deflection and focusing of electron beam in CRT -Orientation of electric and magnetic field in CRT - Applications of CRO.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Millman and Halkias, “Electronic devices and circuits”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Publication, 2007.

2. G.K.Mithal, “Basic Electronic Devices and circuits”, 2nd Edition, G.K.Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 1998.__ 3. David Bell, “Fundamentals of Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 5th Edition, Oxford University Press 2008.

4. Yang, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices”, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1978.

5. Theodre. F. Boghert, ‘Electronic Devices & Circuits’, Pearson Education, VI Edition, 2003.

6. Allen Mottershead, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits - An Introduction’, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2003.

7. Ben G Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.

8. Roody and Coolen, “Electronic Communications”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, Reprint 2007. 9. A.S. Sedra and K.C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, Saunder's College Publishing

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 12: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 26 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1201 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, E&C, CSE and IT) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To understand the operation of microprocessors and microcontrollers, machine language programming,

interfacing techniques and their applications.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSORS 9 Hrs. Introduction, 8085 Architecture, Pin Diagram and signals, Addressing Modes, Timing Diagram- Memory read, Memory write, I/O cycle, Interrupts and its types, Introduction to 8086 microprocessors and its operation.

UNIT 2 PROGRAMMING 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9 Hrs.

8085 assembly language programming, addressing modes, 8085 instruction set, Instruction formats, Instruction Classification: data transfer, arithmetic operations, logical operations, branching operations, machine control —Stack and subroutines, Example Programs

UNIT 3 PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING 9 Hrs. Introduction, memory and I/O interfacing, data transfer schemes, Interface ICs’- USART (8251), programmable

peripheral interface (8255), programmable interrupt controller (8259), programmable counter/interval timer (8254), Analog to Digital Converter (ADC), and Digital to Analog Converter (DAC).

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO MICROCONTROLLER 9 Hrs. Introduction to microcontrollers, Difference between microprocessors and microcontrollers, Architectural features of 8051, I/O Ports, Interrupts, Addressing Modes and Instruction set of 8051, Programming examples.

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS BASED ON 8085 AND 8051 9 Hrs. Interfacing Basic concepts, interfacing LED, 7 segment LED, Stepper motor control system, Temperature control system, Traffic light control system, Motor speed control system, Waveform generation, Interfacing LCD.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Ramesh Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and applications with 8085”, 5th Edition, Penram International Publishing Pvt Ltd, 2010.

2. Kenneth J Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller”, 2nd Edition, Thomson, 2005.

3. Nagoor Kani A, “Microprocessor and Microcontroller”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

4. Mathur A.P. ” Introduction to microprocessor .“

5. Muhammad Ali Mazidi.”The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems.”

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 13: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 27 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1203 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to publicize the student with the design and analysis of Rectifiers and power supplies, Transistor biasing circuits, Small signal analysis of FET and MOSFET amplifiers, design and analysis of feedback amplifiers, oscillators, tuned amplifiers and multivibrators

UNIT 1 RECTIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLIES 9 Hrs.

Half Wave Rectifier - Full Wave Rectifier - Bridge Rectifier - Performance of Rectifiers - Filters - Types of Filters - L, C, LC and π Filters - Ripple Factor Calculation for C, L, LC and π Filter - Regulators - Shunt and Series Voltage Regulator - SMPS.

UNIT 2 SMALL SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Biasing circuit of BJT, DC equivalent circuit of BJT,DC and AC Load Lines, Stability factor analysis, Two port devices and hybrid model - transistor hybrid model and h parameters - determination of h-parameters from the characteristics - Analysis of transistor amplifier using h-parameters - Low frequency FET model -Common Source and Common drain amplifiers.

UNIT 3 MULTI STAGE AMPLIFIERS AND LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Cascading amplifiers - direct coupled and capacitor coupled two stage CE amplifiers - Darlington Pair - Cascode Amplifier- Bootstrap amplifier- Classification of Power amplifiers - Class A Power Amplifier- direct and Transformer coupled amplifiers - Class B Push-pull arrangements and Complementary symmetry amplifiers - efficiency calculations, Amplifier distortion, power dissipation - Class AB amplifier - Power transistor heat sinking - Class C and D amplifiers.

UNIT 4 FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9 Hrs. Feedback Amplifiers: Feedback concept - General characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers - Four basic types of feedback topologies - Voltage and current feedback amplifiers.

Oscillators: Barkhausen criterion - LC oscillators - Analysis of Hartley, colpitts - RC oscillators - Phase shift and wein bridge types and analysis - Crystal oscillators and frequency stability.

UNIT 5 TUNED AMPLIFIERS AND MULTI VIBRATORS 9 Hrs.

Tuned Amplifiers - single tuned -double tuned -stagger tuned amplifiers - Instability of Tuned Amplifier - Neutralization and Unilateralization - Multivibrators - Collector coupled Astable, Monostable and Bistable Multivibrators.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. S Millman and Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill International,2008.

2. R.L. Boylestad and L. Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, India, 9th edition, 2008.

3. D.Roy Choudhury &Shail B Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 3rd edition. 2007.

4. David. A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, PHI Learning Private Ltd, India, 4th edition 2008.

5. R.A. Gayakwad, “Op-Amps and Linear integrated circuits”, PHI, 2008.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 14: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 28 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1205 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - I L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE and ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The objective of this course is to publicize the student with the design and analysis of Rectifiers and power

supplies, Transistor biasing circuits, Small signal analysis of FET and MOSFET amplifiers, Frequency Response and Multistage amplifiers and Large Signal Amplifiers. On completion of this course, the student will recognize

Analysis of different types of Rectifiers and Power Supplies. Hybrid Model of BJT Amplifiers and Small Signal Models of FET and MOSFET Amplifiers.

Frequency response and Multistage Amplifiers and also Large Signal Amplifiers

UNIT 1 RECTIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLIES 9 Hrs.

Half Wave Rectifier - Full Wave Rectifier - Bridge Rectifier - Performance of Rectifiers - Filters - Types of Filters - L, C, LC, π Filters - Ripple Factor Calculation for C, L, LC and π Filter - Regulators - Shunt and Series Voltage Regulator - IC Regulator - SMPS.

UNIT 2 TRANSISTOR BIASING CIRCUITS ANS SMALL SIGNAL ANALYSIS OF BJT AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Biasing- Types of biasing- DC equivalent circuit of BJT- Load Line-DC and AC Load Line Analysis - Hybrid Model of BJT- Hybrid Model Analysis of CE, CB, CC - Calculation of Input Impedance, Output Impedance, Voltage Gain, Current Gain using hybrid model- Approximate Model of BJT- CE, CB and CC Analysis- Small signal equivalent circuit of BJT- Small Signal Analysis of CE, CB and CC.

UNIT 3 SMALL SIGNAL ANALYSIS OF FET AND MOSFET AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Biasing of FET Amplifiers- Types- Small Signal Model of FET- Small Signal Analysis of CS-CD-CG FETCalculation of Input Impedance-output impedance-voltage gain using small signal model- MOSFET Biasing-Types-Small Signal Model of MOSFET-Small Signal Analysis of CS-CD-CG MOSFET- Calculation Input Impedance-output impedance-voltage gain using small signal model

UNIT 4 FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Frequency Resonance- Low Frequency response and High Frequency Response equivalent circuit analysis of BJT- Low Frequency response and High Frequency Response equivalent circuit analysis of FET- Miller’s Effect - Multistage amplifiers-need for multistage amplifiers- methods of interconnecting multistage amplifiers - Types of Multistage amplifiers - Analysis of RC coupled Amplifiers -Analysis of Direct Coupled Amplifiers-Analysis of Transformer Coupled Amplifiers-cascade amplifier- Cascode amplifier- Darlington Emitter Follower Amplifier.

UNIT 5 LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs. Class A power amplifier with resistive and transformer coupled load- calculation of efficiency- Class B-Push

pull-complementary symmetry - efficiency calculation- Class C Power Amplifier- Class AB operation and Class D type of operation- distortion in power amplifiers - Thermal stability of power amplifier..

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Donald. L, Schilling and C.Belove, “Electronic Circuits - Discrete and Integrated”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1989.

2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, PHI, 1998.

3. Gupta. J.B, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Katson Publishers, 2009.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 15: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 29 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1206 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - II L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The objective of this course is to publicize the student with the design and analysis of feedback amplifiers,

oscillators, tuned amplifiers, wave shaping circuits, multivibrators and blocking oscillators.

On completion of this course the student will recognize

Analysis of different types of feedback amplifiers and oscillators. Frequency response and design of tuned amplifiers.

Basic operation and design of wave shaping circuits and multivibrators.

Analysis of time base generators and blocking oscillators.

UNIT 1 FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Basic concept of feedback-Types of Feedback - Properties of negative feedback - Basic Feedback Topologies - Types of negative feedback connection - effect of negative feedback on stability, noise, distortion, gain, input and output impedance, bandwidth- analysis of voltage and current feedback amplifier.

UNIT 2 OSCILLATORS 9 Hrs.

Condition for Oscillation (Barkhausen Criterion) -Classification of Oscillators -General form of LC Oscillator - Analysis of LC Oscillator, Colpitts, Hartley, Clapp , Armstrong, Crystal Oscillator - Analysis of RC Oscillator, RC Phase Shift Oscillator - Wein Bridge Oscillator.

UNIT 3 TUNED AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Resonance Circuits, Unloaded and Loaded Q of Tank Circuit - Bandwidth - Types of Tuned Amplifiers - Analysis of Capacitive coupled and inductive coupled Single Tuned Amplifier - Double Tuned Amplifier-Stagger Tuned Amplifier - Instability of Tuned Amplifier -Stabilization Techniques, Neutralization and Unilaterlization - Class C Tuned Amplifiers.

UNIT 4 WAVE SHAPING AND MULTIVIBRATOR CIRCUITS 9 Hrs.

High Pass RC, RL Circuits and their Response for Step, Ramp and Exponential signal -Low Pass RC, RL Circuits and their Response for Step, Ramp and Exponential signal -Multivibrators- Collector Coupled Astable, Monostable, Bistable Multivibrators and Schmitt Trigger Circuits.

UNIT 5 TIME BASE GENERATORS AND BLOCKING OSCILLATORS 9 Hrs.

Principle of Time Based Generator - Voltage Time Based Generator -Current time Based Generator- Astable Blocking Oscillator using Emitter Timing -Astable Blocking Oscillator using Base Timing-Monostable Blocking Oscillator using Emitter Timing- Monostable Blocking Oscillator using base Timing.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Millman. J And Taub.H, “Pulse, Digital and Switching Waveforms”, TMH, 2000.

2. Mithal G.K, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Khanna Publishers, 23rd Edition, 2004.

3. David A. Bell, “Solid State Pulse Circuits”, PHI, 2002.

4. Venkatraman. R, “Pulse, Digital Circuits and Computer Fundamentals”, DhanpatRai Publications (P) Ltd., 1986

5. Jacob Millman and C. Halkias, “Integrated Electronics, Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1997.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 16: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 30 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1207 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EEE, EIE, ETCE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To publicize the student with the design and analysis of Boolean algebra, logic gates, combinational circuits,

sequential circuits, digital logic families and programmable logic devices.On completion of this course the student will recognize

Various number systems and to simplify the mathematical expressions using Boolean functions- simple problems. Implementation of combinational circuits and Design of various synchronous and asynchronous circuits. Expose to various digital logic families and the students to various memory devices and programmable logic devices

UNIT 1 BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES 9 Hrs. Review of number systems - Binary arithmetic - Binary codes - Boolean algebra and theorems - Boolean

functions -Minimization of Boolean functions-Sum of Products(SOP)-Product of Sums(POS)-Simplifications of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map and tabulation methods - Logic gates- NAND and NOR implementation.

UNIT 2 DESIGN OF COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Combinational circuits - Analysis and design procedures - Half Adder, Full Adder-Half Subtractor, Full Subtractor- Parallel binary Adder, Parallel binary Subtractor- Carry look ahead Adder- BCD Adder-Decoders- Encoders-Priority Encoder- Multiplexers- MUX as universal combinational modules- Demultiplexers- Code convertors- Magnitude Comparator.

UNIT 3 DESIGN OF SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS Introduction to Sequential circuits - Flip flops - SR, JK, D and T flip flops, Master

Characteristic and excitation table - Realization of one flip flop with other flip flops - Registers - Counters - Synchronous and Asynchronous counters - Modulus counters, Up/Down counters Johnson Counter - State diagram, State table, State minimization - Hazards.

9 Hrs. Slave flip flops, Shift registers - - Ring Counter -

UNIT 4 DIGITAL LOGIC FAMILIES 9 Hrs. Classification and characteristics of logic family - Bipolar logic family - Saturated logic family - RTL, DTL,DCTL,

I2L,TTL, HTL - Non saturated family - Schottky TTL, ECL - Unipolar family - MOS, CMOS logic families. Tristate logic. Interfacing of CMOS and TTL families. Comparison of logic families.

UNIT 5 MEMORIES AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES 9 Hrs. Classification of memories - ROM - ROM organization - PROM - EPROM - EEPROM - RAM - RAM organization

- Write operation - Read operation - Memory decoding - Memory expansion - Static RAM - Dynamic RAM - Programmable Logic Devices - Programmable Logic Array (PLA) - Programmable Array Logic (PAL) - Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) - Implementation of combinational logic circuits using ROM, PLA, PAL.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Milos Ercegovac, Jomas Lang, “Introduction to Digital Systems”, Wiley publications, 1998. 2. John M. Yarbrough, “Digital logic: Applications and Design”, Thomas - Vikas Publishing House, 2002.

3. R.P.Jain, “Modern digital Electronics”,3rd Edition, TMH, 2003.

4. William H. Gothmann, “Digital Electronics”, Prentice Hall, 2001.

5. Morris Mano, “Digital design”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 17: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 31 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1208 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS ___ L ______________________ T

P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE, ETCE and E&C) _______________ 3 __ 0 __ 0 ____ 3 _______ 100 __

COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce the concepts and techniques associated with the understanding of signals and systems. To impart Knowledge of time domain representation and analysis concepts as they relate to difference equations, impulse response and convolution, frequency domain representation and analysis concepts using Fourier analysis tools, Z-transform.etc. To Characterize and analyze the properties of CT and DT systems

UNIT 1 CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS 9 Hrs. Continuous time signals (CT signals) and Discrete time signals (DT signals) - Basic operations on

signals-elementary signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Exponential - Classification of CT and DT signals - Periodic, aperiodic signals-Deterministic and Random signals-even and odd signals - Real and Complex signals - Energy and power signals.

UNIT 2 ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9 Hrs. Continuous time Fourier Transform -Properties of CTFT-Inverse Fourier transform- unilateral and bilateral

Laplace Transform analysis with examples - Basic properties - Parseval’s relation - Convolution in time and frequency domain-Inverse Laplace transform using partial fraction expansion method - Relation between Fourier transform and Laplace transform-Fourier series analysis.

UNIT 3 LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Concept of CT systems - Linear Time invariant Systems - Basic properties of continuous time systems -

Linearity, Invertilibity, Causality, Time invariance, Stability - Frequency response of LTI systems - Analysis and characterization of LTI systems using Laplace transform - Differential equation- Computation of impulse response, step response, natural response ,forced response and transfer function using Laplace transform --Convolution integral -Properties of convolution integral.

UNIT 4 ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9 Hrs. Spectrum of DT signals, Discrete Time Fourier Transform (DTFT)- Properties of DTFT - z-transform -Basic

properties of Z transform - Region of convergence - Properties of ROC - Poles and Zeros - Inverse z-transform using Contour integration - Residue Theorem, Power Series expansion and Partial fraction expansion-Relation between DTFT and Z transform.

UNIT 5 LINEAR TIME INVARIANT DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Concept of LTI-DT systems - Properties and types of LTIDT systems- causality, stability, invertibility, time

invariant, linearity -interconnection of LTI Systems -Difference equation - Computation of Impulse response, Frequency response, step response, natural response, forced response and Transfer function using Z Transform, Convolution Sum using matrix, graphical and tabulation method-Properties of convolution sum.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Allan V. Oppenheim et al, ‘Signals and Systems, 2nd Edition., Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1997. 2. P.Ramesh Babu et al, ‘Signals and Systems’, 4th Edition, Scitech publishers, 2010. 3. Haykin. S and Van Been. B., ‘Signals and Systems’, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.

4. Rao.P, "Signals and Systems", 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 5. Lathi, B. P., "Linear Systems and Signals", 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press 2006. 6. Mrinal Mandal, Amir Asif, "Continuous and Discrete Time Signals and Systems", 1st Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2007. 7. Roberts, M.J., "Fundamentals of Signals and Systems", 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.

8. S. Salivahanan et al., "Digital Signal Processing", 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 9. H P Hsu, "Signals and Systems", 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

Page 18: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 32 REGULATIONS 2015

PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 19: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 33 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1209 ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE and ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE On completion of this course the student can understand the basics of various analog modulation techniques,

transmitters, receivers and the concepts of analog communication systems

UNIT 1 BASICS OF ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION AND NOISE THEORY 9 Hrs. Review of time and frequency domain description of signals - Communication system: point to point and broad

cast - Basic model of a communication system: transmitter, receiver and channel - Fundamental limitations: Technological, Physical; Noise, bandwidth (signal and channel) and information capacity - Need for modulation and types - classification of communication based on modulation and channel - Base band and Pass band transmission - Electromagnetic spectrum allocation for various communication systems. Noise in Communication systems: Types and sources of noise; Atmospheric Noise, Thermal Noise, Shot noise, Partition noise, Flicker noise, Transit time noise - noise factor, noise factor for cascaded amplifier (Friss formula) -Noise figure - Equivalent noise temperature and bandwidth - Signal to Noise Ratio.

UNIT 2 AMPLITUDE MODULATION AND DEMODULATION 9 Hrs. STD-AM (DSB-FC) Mathematical representation - waveform, frequency spectrum, bandwidth, power relations and

Modulation index - Multi tone modulation - Limitations and Modifications in STD-AM: DSB-SC, SSB-SC and VSB AM Generation (Modulators): DSB-FC; square law modulator, Collector and base modulator circuits - DSBSC;

Balanced modulator circuit using BJT/FET - SSB: Phase shift method and Filter method - VSB; Filter method-Application and Comparison of various AM schemes - AM transmitter: Low and high level Modulation. AM Detection (Demodulators) - Envelope detector, Significance of RC time constant - Square law detector - Costa’s PLL detector

UNIT 3 ANGLE (FM & PM) MODULATION AND DEMODULATION 9 Hrs. Single tone FM: Mathematical representation, waveform, frequency spectrum, modulation index, bandwidth and

power - Multi-tone FM - Types and comparison of FM: Narrowband and Wideband - Compare FM and AM Phase modulation (PM): Mathematical representation and waveform - Relation between FM and PM - Conversion: FM to PM and PM to FM - Application of FM and PM. FM Generation: Direct method using Varactor diode and indirect method (Armstrong modulator) - Pre-emphasis - FM stereo broadcast transmitter. FM Detector: Balanced slope detector, Foster seelay frequency discriminator and Ratio detector - De- emphasis

UNIT 4 ANALOG PULSE MODULATION, DEMODULATION AND MULTIPLEXING 9 Hrs. Analog pulse modulation - Sampling theorem - Nyquist rate - Concepts of PAM, PWM (PDM) and PPM -

Modulators and demodulators. Multiplexing- classifications: Frequency Division Multiplexing, Time Division Multiplexing and Quadrature Multiplexing - Comparison of multiplexing.

UNIT 5 RECEIVERS AND SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. AM Receivers: TRF receivers -Super heterodyne receivers: choice of IF, double conversion technique, tracking,

AGC- characteristics of receiver - noise in AM receiver. FM Receivers: FM stereo broadcast receivers - AFC - Noise in FM - Capture effect, FM threshold effect. Communication Receivers: Sensitivity, fidelity and selectivity - Squelch circuit - Beat frequency Oscillator. Overview of Telephony, Telegraphy, Television, CCTV and Cable television.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. R.P and Sapre, "Communication Systems: Analog and Digital", 2nd Edition 1995 / 5th Edition Reprint 2000, McGraw Hill Publishers. 2. Deshpande, N.D, Communication Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers,1989. 3. Wayne Thomasi, "Advanced Electronic Communication Systems", 6th Edition, PHI Publishers, 2003. 4. Sanjay Sharma, “Analog Communication Systems”, 2009. 5. Dennis Reddy and John Coolen, "Electronic Communications", 4th Edition, Prentice Hall Publishers, 1995. 6. Kennedy, "Electronic Communications Systems", 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Publishers, 1992.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

Page 20: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 34 REGULATIONS 2015

PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 21: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 35 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1210 TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the concept of transmission lines types, various line parameters, waveguide types and

resonators. On completion of this course the student will recognize. Characterize and analyze the transmission line parameters and Acquire knowledge about the waveguides and resonators.

Analyze transmission lines for various frequencies and also smith-charts.

UNIT 1 TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY 9 Hrs. Introduction - Types of transmission lines - General theory of transmission line - Line constants – Transmission

line equation - Physical significance of the equations - The Infinite line - Distortion in a line - Distortion-less line -Telephone cables - Loading of lines - Types of loading - Campbell’s formula - General equation for line with any termination - Input impedance - Open and Short circuited line. Numerical problems.

UNIT 2 RADIO FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LINES 9 Hrs. Line approximations - Parameters of open wire line at radio frequency, parameters of coaxial lines at

radiofrequencies, constants for the line of zero dissipation - Voltages and Currents on the dissipation-less lines - input impedance of a lossless line - Wavelength and velocity of propagation - Reflection phenomena - Line losses - Return loss - reflection loss- insertion loss.- Reflection coefficient, Reflection factor, Standing wave ratio, Input impedance in terms of reflection coefficient - Practical types - Microwave Transmission line, Super Conducting transmission line, Characteristics of different printed transmission lines.

UNIT 3 MATCHING, MEASUREMENTS AND INTERFERENCES 9 Hrs. Types of transmission line sections - Half wave line - One eighth wave line - Quarter wave line - Properties of

quarter wave transformer - Location of Vm a x and Vm i n - Impedance matching - Single and double stub matching- Smith chart - Solutions of problems using smith chart - Applications of smith chart - Measurement of line parameters-Measurement of VSWR, Wavelength, Impedance and Power - Phenomenon of corona, Methods of reducing corona and interference.

UNIT 4 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9 Hrs. Waves between parallel planes - Transverse electric waves -Transverse magnetic waves - Characteristics of

TE and TM waves - Transverse electromagnetic waves - Velocities of propagation - Attenuation in parallel plane waves - Wave impedance.

UNIT 5 GUIDED WAVES AND WAVEGUIDE THEORY (QUALITATIVE TREATMENT ONLY). 9 Hrs. Rectangular wave guides - TE and TM waves in rectangular wave guides - Dominant mode - Cut off frequency

in wave guides - Impossibility of TEM waves in wave guides - Circular wave guides- TE and TM waves in circular wave guides - Attenuation factor and Q of wave guides-Microwave resonators introduction - rectangular cavity resonator - Q-factor of micro wave cavities.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Edward Jordan and K.G.Balmain, “Electromagnetic waves and radiating system”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2005. 2. Umeshsinha, “Transmission lines and networks”, 8th Edition, Sathya Prakashan Publishers, 2003. 3. John D. Ryder, “Network lines and fields”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.

4. Samuel Y. Liao, “Microwave devices and circuits”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003. 5. David M.Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley, 2002.

6. Seth S.P., “Elements of Electromagnetic Fields”, 2nd Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2007.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 22: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 36 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1213 PROBABILITY THEORY AND RANDOM PROCESS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To have a fundamental knowledge of the basic probability concepts. To have a well-founded knowledge of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomena To acquire skills in handling situations involving more than one random variable and functions of random variables.

To understand and characterize phenomena which evolve discrete and continuous Markov chain.

UNIT 1 PROBABILITY THEORY 12 Hrs. Scheme of Instructions, Introduction to Subject, Axioms of Probability, Probability Space, Conditional

Probability, Bays Theorem, Repeated Trails , Bernoulli’s Trails , Problems, Concept of a Random Variable, Distribution and density functions, Properties of distribution functions, Continuous type random variable, Normal, Exponential , chi-square, Rayleigh, Nakagami-m, uniform etc distributions , Problems, Bernoulli, Binomial, Poisson distributions, Negative binomial distributions.

UNIT 2 RANDOM VARIABLE 12 Hrs. Conditional distributions, Total probability and bays theorem, passion approximation Problems, Functions of

one random variable: Expectation, Variance, Moments, Characteristic functions Problems, One function of two random variable, joint moments, joint characteristic functions, conditional distributions, conditional expected values.

UNIT 3 RANDOM PROCESS 12 Hrs.

Random Process concept, Stationarity and independence Distribution and density functions, statistical independence, First-order stationary processes, Second order and wide sense stationary process, N- order and strict- sense stationary process Problems Time averages and ergodicity , Mean ergodic process, Auto correlation function and its properties, Cross- correlation function and its properties, Covariance functions, discrete time processes and sequences, Power density spectrum and its properties, Problems, Weiner Kinchine theorem.

UNIT 4 DISCRETE PARAMETER MARKOV CHAINS 12 Hrs. Introduction, Computation of n-step transition probabilities Chapman - Kolmogorov equation State classification and limiting Probabilities M/G/1 queueing system, Pollaczek-Khinchin transform equation.

UNIT 5 CONTINUOUS PARAMETER MARKOV CHAIN 12 Hrs. The Birth and Death process (MM/1, M/M/c, M/M/1/N, MM/c/N (c<N), MM/c/c, M/M/ models only, derivation of

mean number of customer in the system, in the queue and waiting time Simple applications) Special case of Birth and Death model (Pure Birth and Pure Death Processes).

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. P.Z. Peebles.Jr., “Probability, random variables and random signal principles”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2002.

2. A.Papoulis, “Probability, Random variables and Stochastic Processes”, McGraw Hill, 3rd edition, 1991.

3. Kishor S.Trivedi, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queuing and Computer Science Applications”, John Wiley & SonsInc. Second Edition, 2002.

4. D.Gross and C.M.Harris, “Fundamentals of Queuing Theory,” Wiley Students Edition, Third Edition,1985. 5. T. Veerarajan, “Probability, statistics and Random Processes”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2005

6. J.Medhi, “Stochastic Processes”, New Age International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 1994.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 23: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 37 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1301 ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the concept of antenna and its elements. To acquire knowledge about various antennas used for various frequencies. To acquire knowledge about various antenna parameters measurements. To understand the concept of RF wave propagation.

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF ANTENNA 9 Hrs. Basic concepts of Retarded Potentials - Antenna Fundamentals and Physics - Radiation from an alternating

current element, Half wave Dipole, quarter wave mono pole - Fields, Power radiated and Radiation Resistance - Antenna Parameters(definition only): Field Patterns, Gain and Directivity, Effective Length, Effective Aperture, Radiation Resistance, Antenna Terminal (self and mutual) Impedance, Polarization, Beam width, Bandwidth.

UNIT 2 ANTENNA ARRAYS 9 Hrs. Arrays of two point sources. Linear arrays of point sources - Direction of Maxima, Direction of Minima and Beam Width - Types of arrays - Broad side, End fire, Colinear, Parasitic arrays. Pattern Multiplication - Binomial arrays.

UNIT 3 SPECIAL PURPOSE ANTENNAS (QUALITATIVE TREATMENT ONLY) 9 Hrs. Antennas for low, medium and high frequencies. Effects of earth on radiation patterns of antennas. Practical

antennas and methods of excitation. Loop antennas, Traveling Wave antennas - V and rhombic antennas, Folded Dipole, Reflector antennas, Yagi arrays and its applications. Slot radiators, Horn antennas, Parabolic Antenna, Lens Antenna and Wide band antennas - Log-periodic antennas and its applications. Analysis of rectangular and circular microstrip antenna. Smart antennas for mobile communications. Antenna for infrared detectors.

UNIT 4 PROPAGATION 9 Hrs. Factors involved in the propagation of Radio Waves. The ground wave, Ionosphere and its effects on radio

waves. Mechanism of Ionospheric propagation. Refraction and Reflection of sky wave by the ionosphere, Ray paths, skip distance, Maximum usable frequency, Fading of signals. Selective fading - Diversity reception. Space wave propagation, Considerations in space wave propagation. Atmospheric effects in space wave propagation. Super Refraction - Duct Wave Propagation.

UNIT 5 MEASUREMENTS 9 Hrs. Measurement of Impedance, Field/Radiation Pattern and gain of antennas,Measurement of

Directivity,Measurement of Antenna efficiency-Antenna Radiation Efficiency,Aperture Efficiency Ionospheric measurements - Vertical incidence measurements of the ionosphere - Relation between oblique and vertical incidence transmission - System Issues - antenna noise.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. K.D.Prasad, “Antennas and Wave Propagation”, Satya Prakasan, 3rd Edition, New Delhi,2001.

2. C A Balanis, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley Publishers, 2005.

3. J.D.Kraus, “Antennas”, 3rd Edition, Mc-Graw Hill book company, 2002.

4. F.E.Terman, “Electronic and Radio Engineering”, Mc Graw Hill book company, 2004.

5. Rajeshwari Chatterjee, “Antenna Theory and Practice”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1988

6. Robert E.Collin, “Antennas and Radio wave propagation”, McGraw Hill, 2002

7. Edward C.Jordan, “EM Waves and Radiating Systems”, PH1, 2003

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PRT B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 24: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 38 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1302 ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EEE, EIE, ETCE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To comprehend the concepts of Op-Amp and its application To study the various Filters and signal generators To acquire knowledge about ADC and DAC

To study the basic principles of PLL and Timer Circuit To understand the concept of Special function ICs

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO OP- AMP AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

OP-AMP- DC and AC Characteristics- Input offset voltage- Input bias current-Input offset current- Total output offset voltage- Thermal drift- Slew rate- CMRR -Inverting amplifier- Non-inverting amplifier- Voltage follower-Summing and differential amplifier- Integrator- Differentiator- Logarithmic and Anti logarithmic amplifiers-Comparator and Schmitt trigger.

UNIT 2 FILTERS AND SIGNAL GENERATORS 9 Hrs.

First order and Second order Butterworth filters- low pass, high pass, band pass and band reject filters -RC phase shift, Wein’s bridge oscillator- Astable and Monostable multivibrator-Precision half wave and full wave rectifiers.

UNIT 3 A/D AND D/A CONVERTERS 9 Hrs.

Sample and Hold circuit - Digital to analog converters: R-2R ladder network and Binary weighted - Characteristics of D/A converters - Analog to digital converters: Flash converter - Successive approximation converter - Dual slope ADC.

UNIT 4 PLL AND TIMER CIRCUITS 9 Hrs. Phase Locked Loop IC 565- Block schematic - Applications of PLL: FM demodulator and Frequency synthesizer-FSK Demodulator- VCO IC LM 566 - Timer IC LM 555 and its applications: Astable and Monostable multivibrator.

UNIT 5 SPECIAL FUNCTION ICs 9 Hrs. Integrated circuit Tuned amplifier, Instrumentation Amplifier, Series and shunt voltage regulator, Opto coupler, CMOS Operational Amplifier- Dc analysis- small signal analysis- specifications of IC MC 14573.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Ramakant A.Gayakwad, “OP-AMP and Linear ICs”, 4th Edition, Prentice Hall / Pearson Education, 1994.

2. D.Roy Choudary, Shail Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2000.

3. Grey and Meyer, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, 4th Edition, Wiley International, 2001.

4. Michael Jacob, “Applications and Design with Analog Integrated Circuits, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 1993.

5. S. Salivahanan, V.S. Kanchana Bhaaskaran, “Linear integrated circuits”, 3rd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2011.

6. William D.Stanely, “Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 25: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 39 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1303 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquire knowledge about telephone, television.

To gain the concepts in Radar and wireless communication. To Know about satellite communication.

UNIT 1 TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. Telephones - Standard Telephone and local loop - Electronics Telephone - Telephone System- Cordless

Telephone -Telephone Facsimile - Fax Machine Operation - Paging System -Cellular Telephone system - Digital cellular Telephone system - ISDN.

UNIT 2 TELEVISION COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Conditional distributions, Total probability and bays theorem, passion approximation Problems, Functions of one random variable: Expectation, Variance, Moments, Characteristic functions Problems, One function of two random variable, joint moments, joint characteristic functions, conditional distributions, conditional expected values.

UNIT 3 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Satellite basics - Orbit dynamics - Types of Satellite Orbits - Satellite system - System calculation - satellite sub system and earth station sub system - Satellite Frequency band -Satellite Applications - Noise in satellite communication system - multiple access method - FDMA and TDMA system.

UNIT 4 RADAR COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

RADAR basics - RADAR block diagram and operation - Range equation -RADAR scanning system - Types of RADAR - Doppler effect CW radar - FM CW radar - MTI radar- Pulsed radar - tracking - detection of radar signals in noise - correlation detection.

UNIT 5 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. Review of IEEE standards - Bluetooth - Piconet - Bluetooth Usage models - Bluetooth Architecture - IR -

Ultrasonic- Ultrasonic Production - Applications of Ultrasonic - RF - WiFi - ZigBee - ZigBee Architecture - ZigBee Network Topologies.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Louis. E. Frenzel, “Communication Electronics Principles and applications”, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002..

2. Dennis Roody and John Coolen, “Electronic Communications”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002

3. George Kennedy, “Electronic Communication Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1984

4. Merill I Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, 3rd edition, McGraw Hill 2002..

5. R.Gulati, “Monochrome and colour television”, 2nd edition, New age international 2005.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 26: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 40 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1306 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The aim of the course is to provide The basic details about the data communication and networking

A clear understanding of various IEEE networking standards An in depth knowledge about the various layers of ISO model data communication system

UNIT 1 DATA COMMUNICATION- BASICS 9 Hrs.

Digital data - digital signals - Bit rate - Bit length - Data rate limits - noise less channels - Noisy channel - Shanon capacity - Performance - Bandwidth - throughput - latency - Bandwidth delay product - jitters.

Circuit switched networks - Datagram networks - virtual circuit networks - connection oriented and connection less services - Structure of circuit switches and packet switches - OSI reference model - TCP/IP reference model - comparison of both models.

UNIT 2 NETWORKING 9 Hrs. Network Topologies - mesh, star, bus, and ring - hybrid topology - Network Standardization - De facto and De

jure standards of networks - ITU - ISO - IETF - NIST - IEEE - Different IEEE802 working groups - internet-Architecture of the internet - Third generation mobile networks - UMTS Architecture - Wired Ethernet - Wireless LANs IEEE 802.11 - RFID - Different types - sensor networks - Multi hop topology of sensor networks.

UNIT 3 PHYSICAL LAYER AND DATALINK LAYER 9 Hrs. The Physical layer - Media - Twisted pair - coaxial cable - microwave - infrared - millimetre wave - PSTN - The local loop modem - ADSL - Switching - Internet over cable - cable modems

The Data link layer - design issues - Error detection and control - data link protocols - HDLC - PPP - IEEE standards for data link layer.

UNIT 4 MAC SUB LAYER AND NETWORK LAYER 9 Hrs. MAC sub layer for Standard Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Wireless LAN and broadband wireless.Design issues of

network layer - Routing algorithm - shortest path routing - Distance vector routing - Broadcast routing - Congestion control algorithm - Congestion control in virtual circuit and datagram switches - The network layer in the internet - The IP protocol - IP Addresses - Mobile IP - IPv6.

UNIT 5 TRANSPORT LAYER AND APPLICATION LAYER 9 Hrs. The transport layer - service provided to the upper layer - Elements of transport protocols - Addressing - connection establishment - connection release - UDP - TCP

TELNET - E mail - The user agent - Message transfer agent-SMTP - Message access agent: POP and IMAP - File Transfer Protocol - HTTP - SNMP - VOIP.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Andrew S Tanenbaum “Computer Networks” 5th Edition. Pearson Education/PH I/2011.

2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking” Fourth Edition, Mc GrawHill HIGHER Education 2007.

3. Michael A.Gallo, William Hancock.M, Brooks/Cole Computer Communications and Networking Technologies,2001

4. Richard Lai and Jirachief pattana, “Communication Protocol Specification and Verification”, Kluwer Publishers, Boston, 1998. 5. Pallapa Venkataram and Sunilkumar S.Manvi, “Communication protocol Engineering”, PHI Learning, 2008

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 27: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 41 REGULATIONS 2015

MICROPROCESSOR, INTERFACING L T P Credits Total Marks

SEC1310 AND ITS APPLICATIONS 3 0 0 3 100

(For EEE)

COURSE OBJECTIVE To enhance the idea of computer architecture, Assembly language programming and interfacing of various peripherals for system design, two different processors such as 8085 and 8086 were incorporated

UNIT 1 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9 Hrs. 8085 Architecture- Timing Diagram- Interrupts-Addressing Modes- Instruction Formats- Instruction Set-Programming of 8085.

UNIT 2 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9 Hrs. 8086 Architecture- Maximum and Minimum Mode- Memory Banks- Memory Segmentation- Programming Model - Instruction Set- Programming of 8086.

UNIT 3 PERIPHERALS INTERFACING USING 8085/8086 9 Hrs.

Introduction, memory and I/O interfacing, data transfer schemes, programmable peripheral interface (8255), programmable DMA controller (8257), programmable interrupt controller (8259), Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) (8251), programmable counter/interval timer (8254).

UNIT 4 INTERFACING CONCEPTS WITH 8085/8086 9 Hrs. Switches- Matrix Keyboard- interfacing LED, 7 segment LED, LCD, Analog to Digital Converter (ADC), Digital to Analog Converter (DAC), Memory Interfacing (RAM and ROM).

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS USING 8085/8086 9 Hrs. Stepper motor interfacing with ULN2003- specific angle rotation, Motor speed control, Temperature control

system, Traffic light control- 6V relay to control AC Bulb- PWM generation for Single phase controlled rectifier with specific firing angle.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Ramesh Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and applications with 8085”, 5th Edition, Penram International Publishing Pvt Ltd, 2010.

2. D. V. Hall, “Microprocessor Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”, McGraw Hill, 1993.

3. Nagoor Kani A, “Microprocessor (8085) and its Applications”, 2nd Edition, RBA publications.

4. Mathur A.P, “Introduction to Microprocessor”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 28: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 42 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1313 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To know the principles of sampling & quantization.

To understand the various Base Band signaling schemes.

To introduce the basic concepts of digital modulation of baseband signals. To learn the various synchronization schemes.

To discuss about the spread spectrum modulation schemes.

UNIT 1 SAMPLING AND QUANTIZATION 9 Hrs.

Review of Sampling process -Natural Sampling-Flat Sampling - Aliasing - Signal Reconstruction-Quantization - Uniform & non-uniform quantization - quantization noise Bandwidth -Noise trade off-PCM- Noise considerations in PCM- differential pulse code modulation - Delta modulation -Linear prediction - Adaptive Delta Modulation.

UNIT 2 BASEBAND PULSE TRANSMISSION 9 Hrs. Base band transmission - Wave form representation of binary digits -Matched Filter- Error Rate due to noise - -

Nyquist’s criterion for Distortionless Base band Binary Transmission- Inter symbol Interference - Ideal Nyquist channel - Raised cosine channels- Correlative level coding - Baseband M-ary PAM transmission- Equalization - Eye patterns- Companding - A law and µ law- correlation receiver.

UNIT 3 DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. Introduction - ASK- FSK - PSK- coherent modulation techniques-BFSK-BPSK-signal space diagram-robability of

error-Coherent Quadrature modulation techniques- QPSK-signal space diagram-probability of error- Non coherent modulation techniques-M-ary modulation techniques - Vectorial view of MPSK and MFSK - error performance.

UNIT 4 SYNCHRONIZATION 9 Hrs. Synchronization: Receiver synchronization - Coherent systems - Symbol and frame synchronization - Network

synchronization - Open and closed loop transmitter synchronization - Tracking and acquisition in spread spectrum system.

UNIT 5 SPREAD SPECTRUM MODULATION 9 Hrs.

Pseudo- noise sequences - a notion of spread spectrum - Direct sequence spread spectrum with coherent binary phase shift keying - Signal space Dimensionality and processing gain -Probability of error - Frequency -hop spread spectrum- Use of spread spectrum with code division multiple access.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Simon Haykins, “Communication Systems” John Wiley, 5th Edition, March 2009.

2. Taub. HDL Schilling, G Saha, ”Principles of Communication”3rd edition,2007.

3. John G. Proakis, Masoud Salehi, “Digital Communication”, McGraw Hill 5th edition November 6, 2007.

4. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communication, Fundamentals and Application”, Pearson Education Asia, 2nd Edition, Jan. 21, 2001.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 29: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 43 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1314 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE, E&C and ETCE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge of signal representation in time domain, Fourier transform, sampling theorem, linear time-invariant system, discrete convolution, z-transform, discrete Fourier transform, discrete filter design, finite word length effects and multi-rate signal processing To analyze signal processing and designing a signal processors (digital filters).

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 12 Hrs. Representation, Characterization and Classifications of Continuous Time (CT) & Discrete Time (DT) signals,

Sampling theorem - Aliasing effect, Operations on DT signals , Convolution, Advantages of DSP over ASP , Classification of CT & DT systems , properties of Discrete time systems-Linearity-Time invariance- causality -stability -Linear time Invariant systems, Difference equation representation of LTI systems-The Z transform- properties of Z transform- Inverse Z transform-System transfer Function.

UNIT 2 DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM (DFT) AND FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM (FFT) 12 Hrs. DFT and its properties, Relation between DTFT and DFT, FFT computations using Decimation in time (DIT)

algorithms and Decimation in frequency (DIF) algorithms, Auto correlation, Cross correlation, and their properties. Realization of Discrete Time System: introduction, Basic Realization block diagram and the signal flow graph, Realization of recursive and non recursive systems - Direct Form I and Form II - Cascade and parallel realization.

UNIT 3 DIGITAL FILTER DESIGN 12 Hrs. Design of Digital Filters: General considerations: causality and its implications, characteristics of practical

frequency selective filter. Design of FIR filter using window method - Rectangular, Hanning and Hamming Windows. Design of IIR filters using Impulse invariant and Bilinear transformation method. Review of Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations, Frequency selective filters: Ideal filter characteristics, low pass, high pass and band pass filters, Properties of IIR and FIR filters

UNIT 4 FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS 12 Hrs. Fixed point and floating point number representations - Comparison - Truncation and Rounding errors -

Quantization noise - derivation for quantization noise power -coefficient quantization error - Product quantization error - Overflow error - Round off noise power - limit cycle oscillations due to product round off and overflow errors - signal scaling.

UNIT 5 MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING 12 Hrs. Introduction to Multirate signal processing-Decimation-Interpolation- Polyphase implementation of FIR filters for

interpolator and decimator -Multistage implementation of sampling rate conversion- Design of narrow band filters - Applications of Multirate signal processing, Speech compression, Adaptive filter, Musical sound processing, Image enhancement.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. John C. Proakis & Dimities G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing, Algorithm and Applications”, 4th Edition, PHI, 2009. 2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 1997. 3. B.P.Lathi, “Signal Processing & Linear systems”, Oxford, 2000. 4. Lyons, “Understanding Digital Signal Processing”, Addison Wesley, 1999.

5. Rabiner and Gold, “Theory and Application of Digital Signal Processing”, PHI, 1975. 6. Johny R. Johnson, “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, PHI, 7. Oppenhein & Schaffer, “Discrete Signal Processing”, PHI, 1975

8. Salivahanan, “Digital Signal Processing, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2010

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 30: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 44 REGULATIONS 2015

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

SEC1315 AND ITS APPLICATIONS 3 0 0 3 100

(For EEE)

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart basic ideas in signals and systems

To give basic idea of Analog and Digital filter design with various structures of realying it. To learn about the effects of finite word length in signal processing

To learn a DSP controller pertaining to Power Eletronics via Progrmming.

UNIT 1 SIGNALS, SYSTEMS & TRANSFORMS 9 Hrs.

Sampling theorem- Aliasing-Classifications of Signals and Systems - Review of Z transform & Inverse Z Transform-ROC - Time and frequency response analysis using standard test signals ( step and ramp) - Convolution-Correlation -DTFT- DFT- Properties of DFT- FFT computations using Decimation algorithms.

UNIT 2 DESIGN OF INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTER (IIR) 9 Hrs. Design of IIR filters using Impulse invariant and Bilinear transformation method- Prewarping. Review of

Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations- Frequency transformation in analog domain- Filter design using butterwoth and chebyshev- Realization of recursive structures-Direct form-I-Direct form-II-Cascaded-Parallel Form.

UNIT 3 DESIGN OF FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE (FIR) FILTER 9 Hrs.

. Properties of IIR and FIR filters - Filter design using windowing techniques - Hamming, Hanning, Blackman, Rectangular, Triangular windows- Digital filter design using Frequency sampling technique- Realization of Structures for FIR and Linear phase FIR filter- Direct form-Transposed form- Cascaded form .

UNIT 4 FINITE WORDLENGTH EFFECTS 9 Hrs. Finite word length effect- Quantization- Truncation, Rounding-Quantization error- Input quantization error-Coefficient of quantization- Product quantization- Limit Cycle oscillations- Overflow- Signal scaling.

UNIT 5 TMS320C2407 DSP CONTROLLER & PROGRAMMING

FOR POWER ELECTRONICS APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Nomenclature- TMS 320 family overview -Architectural Overview-Central Processing unit - Addressing modes- Event Manager- General purpose timers (GPR)- Full compare Unit (FCU)- Dead band unit- simple programs for PWM generation using GPR and FCU pertaining to Power electronic applications.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing - Principles, Algorithms & Applications”, Fourth edition, Pearson education / Prentice Hall, 2007

2. Emmanuel C.. Ifeachor, & Barrie.W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Second edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.

3. Alan V.Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer & Hohn. R.Back, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2nd edition, 2005

4. Andreas Antoniou, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 31: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 45 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1316 CMOS VLSI DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EEE, E&C, EIE and ETCE) ____________ 3 __ 0 __ 0 ____ 3 _______ 100 __

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To focus on

Key elements of semiconductor physics, Predominant CMOS technology and circuit style. To study challenges of digital VLSI design, Conceptual thinking and design methodology over detailed circuit

analysis techniques.

UNIT 1 MOS TRANSISTOR THEORY The MOS transistor-Current Voltage Relations-Threshold Voltage-Second order effects-Capacitances in MOSFET -

Scaling of MOS circuits -Review of CMOS - DC characteristics - Dynamic behavior- Power consumption .

UNIT 2 COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN 9 Hrs. nMOS depletion load and Static CMOS design - Determination of Pull-up and Pull-down ratio-Design of Logic

gates- Sizing of transistors -Stick diagrams-Lay out diagram for static CMOS - Pass transistor logic - Dynamic CMOS design - Noise considerations - Domino logic, np CMOS logic - Power consumption in CMOS gates - Multiplexers - Transmission gates design.

UNIT 3 SEQUENTIAL LOGIC DESIGN 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Static sequential circuits- CMOS static flip-flop - Dynamic sequential circuits -Pseudo static latch- Dynamic two phase flip-flop - clocked CMOS logic - Pipelining - NORA CMOS logic -True single phase clocked logic - Realization of D-FF in TSPC logic.

UNIT 4 SUBSYSTEM DESIGN 9 Hrs. Introduction-Designing Static and Dynamic Adder circuits - The Array Multiplier - Multiplier

structures-Baugh-Wooly - Booth Multiplier - Barrel shifter - Memory structures - SRAM and DRAM design - Design approach of Programmable logic devices - PLA,PAL and FPGA.

UNIT 5 ASIC CONSTRUCTION 9 Hrs. Physical design - Goals and Objectives - Partitioning methods - Kernighan Lin algorithm - Hierarchical Floor

planning - Floor planning tools -input, output and power planning -Min-cut placement, Force directed placement algorithm -Placement using simulated annealing - Greedy channel routing.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Jan M.Rabaey ,“Digital Integrated Circuits” , 2nd edition, September,PHl Ltd. 2000

2. M.J.S.Smith ,“Application Specific Integrated Circuits “, Ist edition,Pearson education. 1997

3. Douglas A.Pucknell,”Basic VLSI design”, PHI Limited, 1998.

4. E.Fabricious, “Introduction to VLSI design”, Mc Graw Hill Limited, 1990.

5. Neil Weste , “Principles of CMOS VLSI design”, Addison Wesley 1998.

6. Wayne Wolf,”Modern VLSI design ‘2nd Edition, Pearson education. 2003

7. Sung-Mo Kang & Yusuf,”CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits- Analysis & Design”, 2nd Edition, MGH.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 32: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 46 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1317 PRINCIPLES OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To impart knowledge about 8 bit microcontroller, PIC microcontroller, comparison of CISC, RISC and

Embedded system design.

UNIT 1 8051 MICROCONTROLLER ARCHITECTURE 9 Hrs. Comparison of microprocessors and microcontrollers - 8051 architecture - hardware, I/O pins, Ports, Memory, counters, timers, serial I/O interrupts.

UNIT 2 PROGRAMMING OF 8051 9 Hrs. Addressing modes - instruction sets - simple programs with 8051 -I/O Programming.- Timer programming-Serial communication programs- Interrupt programming- Memory programming- Delay Programs.

UNIT 3 RISC EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS 9 Hrs. Comparison of CISC and RISC controllers - PIC 16F877 architecture - memory organization - addressing modes - assembly language instructions- ARM 7 Architecture-Register organization- Modes and states.

UNIT 4 DISTRIBUTED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9 Hrs. Distributed Embedded system - Embedded networking -RS 232 - RS485 - Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) - Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) - Universal Serial Bus (USB) - Controller Area Network (CAN)- Ethernet.

UNIT 5 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Introduction - Desktop OS versus RTOs - Task management - Task scheduling - Race conditions - Priority Inversion - ISRs and Scheduling - Intertask Communication.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Kenneth. J. Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Apllications’, Penram International, 1996, 2nd Edition.

2. Sriram. V. Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, 2004 Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing company limited, 2006.

3. D.P.Kothari, ShriramK. Vasudevan, Subashri.V, Sivaraman Ramachandran, “Analysis of Microcontrollers”, Scientific International Pvt Ltd, MEDTEC, ,1st Edition..

4. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, ‘Embedded system Design - A unified Hardware / software Introduction’, John Wiley and Sons,2002.

5. Todd D Morton, ‘Embedded microcontrollers’, Reprint by 2005, Low Price Edition.

6. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, ‘The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems’, Low price Edition, Second Impression 2006.

7. Raj Kamal, ‘Embedded Systems-Architecture, Programming and Design’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company limited 2003.

8. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, rolin D.Mckinlay, Dannycauscy, “ PIC microcontrollers and embedded systems using assembly and C”, 1st edition, Pearson,2007.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 33: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 47 REGULATIONS 2015

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

SEC1320 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, , E&C, CSE and IT) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the basics of Embedded System.

To explain the various development tools in embedded System.

To get a knowledge in embedded programming and acquire a knowledge in embedded system application

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM 8 Hrs. Embedded system- characteristics of embedded system- categories of embedded system- requirements of

embedded systems- challenges and design issues of embedded system- trends in embedded system- system integration- hardware and software partition- applications of embedded system- control system and industrial automation-biomedical-data communication system-network information appliances- IVR systems- GPS systems.

UNIT 2 EMBEDDED SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND TOOLS 8 Hrs. Software architectures, Round - Robin, Round-Robin with Interrupts, Function Queue Scheduling architecture,

Introduction to assembler - Compiler -Cross compilers and Integrated Development Environment IDE, Linker/ Locators, Simulators, Getting Embedded software into target System- Debugging Strategies.

UNIT 3 EMBEDDED NETWORKING 9 Hrs. Embedded Networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports - Serial Bus communication protocols- RS232 standard -

RS485 - CAN Bus - RS485 - Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) - Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) - PC Parallel port communication Protocols -Bluetooth-network using ISA, PCI- Wireless and Mobile System Protocols.

UNIT 4 EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 10 Hrs. Programming in assembly language (ALP) vs High Level Language - C Program Elements:- Macros and

functions, Use of Date Types, Structure, Pointers, Function Calls - Concepts of Embedded Programming in C++-Objected Oriented Programming, Embedded Programming in C++,‘C’ Program compilers - Cross compiler - Optimization of memory needs-Java programming advantages, disadvantages and J2ME concept.

UNIT 5 EMBEDDED SYSTEM TESTING AND APPLICATION 10 Hrs. Introduction to embedded system testing - Types of testing: Unit testing, Regression testing, Functional testing,

Coverage tests, Gray box test and performance testing - Embedded applications: Case study of Smart card, Interfacing stepper motor, RFID-system, Application, Tag Reader - Handheld Device - Washing Machine.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. KVKK Prasad, “Embedded / Real Time Systems”, Dreamtech Press, 2005. 2. David Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian Reprint 2000.

3. Raj Kamal, ‘Embedded system-Architecture, Programming, Design’, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011.

4. Arnold Berger, “Embedded system design”, CMP books, 1st Edition, 2005

5. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as components”, Morgan Kaufmann publishers, 2nd Edition, 2008. 6. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Elsevier, 2006

7. Steve Heath, “Embedded Systems Design”, Second Edition, Elsevier India Pvt.Ltd.,2007.

8. Narayan and Gong, “Specification and design of Embedded System”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 1999.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 34: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 48 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1321 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquaint the students with the architecture, theory and operation of telecommunication systems, issues

related to telecommunication systems and the services rendered by the system to the end users. On completion of this course, the students will,

Acquire basic knowledge on telecommunication and various signaling related to it Acquire knowledge on traffic in telecommunication systems Acquire knowledge about QoS and various impairments

UNIT 1 BASICS OF TELECOMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. End users, nodes and connectivities, telephone numbering and Routing, use of Tandem switches in Local area

connectivity, Busy Hour and Grade of Service, Simple, Half duplex and full duplex, One-way and two-way circuits, Network topologies, variations in traffic flow, quality of service, Standardization in telecommunication.

UNIT 2 SIGNALLING IN TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Introduction, purpose of signaling, Defining the functional areas-supervisory signaling, address signaling and

Call Progress-audio and visual. Signaling techniques - conveying signaling information, evolution of signaling subscriber call progress tones and push button codes, compelled signaling, concepts of Link-by-link and end-to-end signaling, effects of numbering on signaling, associated and disassociated channel signaling, signaling in the subscriber loop-background and purpose, metallic trunk signaling - basic loop signaling, reverse-battery signaling, stimulus signaling, functional signaling, Object-oriented signaling.

UNIT 3 TELECOMMUNICATION TRAFFIC 9 Hrs. Unit of Traffic, traffic measurement, a mathematical model, Lost- call systems: Theory, traffic performance, loss

systems in tandem. Queuing systems - Erlang Distribution, probability of delay, Finite queue capacity, systems with a single server, Queues in tandem, delay tables and application of Delay formulae. Traffic Characteristics - arrival distributions, Holding time distribution. Loss Systems - Lost calls cleared, lost calls returning, lost calls Held, lost calls cleared. Overflow Traffic.

UNIT 4 TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICES ENGINEERING 9 Hrs. Introduction, definition for service and service engineering. Telecommunication services

engineering-Telecommunication services on broad band networks - basics of ATM, connection oriented and connectionless services.

UNIT 5 QUALITY OF SERVICE AND TELECOMMUNICATION IMPAIRMENTS 9 Hrs. QoS (voice, data and image) - signal-to-noise ratio, voice transmission, data circuits, video. Basic impairments -

amplitude distortion, phase distortion and noise. Level - typical levels, echo and singing. QoS issues in video transmission - problems and solutions. Protocols for QoS support for audio and video applications - RSVP applications, Real-Time Streaming Protocol Applications and Active Streaming Format, Internet stream protocol (version 2), IP Multicast

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Roger L. Freeman, “Fundamentals of Telecommunications”, John Wiley & Sons, 1999. 2. Kornel Terplan, Patricia Morreale Boca Raton, “The Telecommunications Handbook”, CRC Press LLC, 2000.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 35: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 49 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1402 PROGRAMMING IN HDL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To focus on the basic concept of VHDL, styles and features of verilog HDL.

UNIT 1 BASIC CONCEPTS IN VHDL 9 Hrs. Digital system design process - Hardware simulation - Introduction to VHDL - Language elements of VHDL -

Data objects - Data types - Operators - Signal assignments - Inertial delay mechanism - Transport delay mechanism - Variable assignments - Concurrent and Sequential assignments- Delta delay.

UNIT 2 MODELING IN VHDL 9 Hrs.

Data flow modeling - Concurrent Signal Assignment statements - Structural modeling - Component declaration - Component Instantiation - Behavioral modeling - Process statement - wait statement - Conditional and loop statements - Generics and configurations - Examples for modelings.

UNIT 3 INTRODUCTION TO VERILOG HDL 9 Hrs. Basic concepts - Levels for design description - Module - Delays - Language elements - Compiler directives - value set - data types - Parameters - Expressions - Operands - operators in verilog HDL.

UNIT 4 STYLES OF MODELING 9 Hrs.

Gate level modeling -Primitive Gates- Multiple input and multiple output gates - User Defined Primitives - Combination UDP - Sequential UDP- Data flow modeling - Behavioral modeling - procedural constructs - procedural assignments - conditional and loop statements - Structural Modeling - Examples for modeling.

UNIT 5 FEATURES IN VERILOG HDL 9 Hrs. Tasks- Functions -systems tasks and functions - Verification - Modeling a test bench - timing and delays -

Switch level modeling - state machine modeling - Moore FSM - Melay FSM - Design of memories - Design of microcontroller CPUs.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. J.Bhaskar, “A VHDL Primer”, , Prentice Hall of India Limited. 3rd edition 2004

2. Douglas L. Perry, "VHDL", McGraw Hill, 2002.

3. J.Bhaskar, “A Verilog HDL Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Limited. 3rd edition 2004

4. Stphen Brown, "Fundamental of Digital logic with VHDL Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 36: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 50 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1403 OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce the principle of light propagation through optical fibers.

To understand signal distortion mechanisms in the fiber.

To introduce optical transmitters and receivers for fiber /free space links and the fiber optic couplers, connectors involved.

To introduce optical network concepts and components involved and its Applications.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL FIBERS 9 Hrs. Basics of optical communication system, light propagation in optical fibers, Optical spectral bands, Advantages

of optical fiber communication over other communication systems, Ray theory and mode theory. Total internal reflection, Acceptance angle, Numerical aperture, phase and group velocity, cutoff wavelength & group delay. Different types of optical fibers, refractive index profiles & mode transmission.

UNIT 2 TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS AND OPTICAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Characteristics of optical fibers: Attenuation due to absorption, scattering & bending, core and cladding loses, Signal Distortion in optical fibers: Intra modal Dispersion: Material & Waveguide dispersion; Intermodal dispersion: MMSI, MMGI & modal noise.

Optical Amplifiers: Basic concepts, Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier, Raman amplifier -principles of operation, amplifier noise, signal to noise ratio, gain, gain bandwidth, intermodulation effects and wavelength range of operation.

UNIT 3 OPTICAL TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9 Hrs. Fiber optic Transmitter module. Optical sources- LEDs, LASER diodes- Principles of operation: concepts of line

width, phase noise. Optical detectors- PN, P-I-N, Avalanche photodiodes: Principles of operation: concepts of responsivity, sensitivity and quantum efficiency, noise in detection. Fiber optic Receiver module.

UNIT 4 COUPLERS, CONNECTORS AND OPTICAL LINK 9 Hrs.

Couplers: 2x2 coupler, Tap coupler, star coupler, Connectors: Cylindrical ferrule, Biconical Ferrule, Double eccentric, Splices: Fusion splices, Mechanical splices, Multiple splices. Design considerations in optical links, Point to point Links: Link Power budget, Rise Time budget, Analog Links: CNR, Multichannel transmission techniques-Multichannel Frequency Modulation, Subcarrier multiplexing.WDM Concepts and Components.

UNIT 5 OPTICAL NETWORKING PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS. 9 Hrs. FDDI, WDM, SONET/SDH,ATM,IP over WDM, Optical LAN Standards-IEEE802.3,Broad band and select WDM networks, Applications- Military.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Gerd Kaiser , “Optical Fiber Communications”, 4 th edition, Sixth reprint, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi,2009.

2. John M. Senior,”Optical Fiber Communications- Principles And Practice”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.

3. Gerd Keiser, “Optical communications Essentials”, Special Indian Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi,2008.

4. Govind P. Agrawal, “ Fiber-Optic Communication Systems”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.

5. Rajiv Ramasamy & Kumar N. Sivarajan, “Optical Networks - A Practical Perspective”, 2 Ed, Morgan Kauffman 2002.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 37: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 51 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1405 RF AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES Analyze transmission-line circuits at RF and microwave frequencies and Perform Scattering parameter analysis of RF networks and microwave systems and assess the impact of microwave component performances on overall system performance Describe the operation and analyze the performance of basic microwave components and to Design basic microwave components Analyze Assess qualitatively and quantitatively the role of microwave components in the application areas of MIC, MEMS, wireless systems and UWB systems

UNIT 1 MICROWAVE NETWORKS AND COMPONENTS Introduction to microwaves and applications, advantages of microwaves, EM spectrum domain, Review of

Low frequency parameters, salient features of S-matrix, salient features of multiport network, losses in microwave circuits, Waveguide corners, bends and twists. Isolator, Circulator- S-matrix of series element in the transmission line, S-matrix for E-plane Tee junction, S-matrix for H-plane Tee junction, S-matrix for magic Tee junction, S-matrix for directional coupler, Strip lines , Micro strip lines and coplanar waveguides.

UNIT 2 POWER DIVIDERS AND COUPLERS Basic properties of dividers and couplers: three port networks, four port networks, The T junction power

divider: lossless divider, resistive divider, Wilkinson power divider: unequal power division and n- way Wilkinson power dividers, Quadrature hybrid (90°) coupler, Lange couplers, 180° Hybrid coupler, Even and odd mode analysis of the Wilkinson power divider, the quadrature hybrid, and ring hybrid, Filters design by image parameter and insertion loss method.

UNIT 3 MICROWAVE SOURCES MICROWAVE TUBES: Klystron, Reflex Klystron, Magnetron - schematic, Principle of operation, performance,

characteristics and application. MICROWAVE SOLID STATE DEVICES:PIN, Tunnel, Gunn, IMPATT and TRAPATT diodes, their construction

and Principle of operation. UNIT 4 MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS

Microwave Bench general measurement set up, Measurement Devices and instrumentation: Slotted line, VSWR meter, power meter, spectrum analyser, Network analyser, Measurement of frequency, impedance, Attenuation, power and dielectric constant, measurement of VSWR, insertion loss ,EMI / EMC basics and measurement methods.

UNIT 5 MICROWAVE AND MILLIMETER WAVE SYSTEMS System aspects of antennas-microwave communication systems-the Friis power transmission formula-Microwave

transmitters and receivers-noise characterization of microwave receiver-Frequency multiplexed systems-Radar systems-Millimetre-Wave Radios in Backhaul Networks-The 60 GHz, 70 GHz,80 GHz,90GHz frequency bands and channel sizes , The FCC and NTIA licensing process, Multi GBPS data communication and system requirements.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. David M. Pozar “Microwave Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons - 3rd Edition, 2009. 2. Samuel Y Liao, “Microwave Devices & Circuits”, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition, 2008. 3. Kulkarni M, "Microwave and Radar Engineering", Umesh Publication, 4th ed,2010.. 4. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, “Microwave Engineering”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Inc., 2004. 5. M.M.Radmanesh , “RF & Microwave Electronics Illustrated”, Pearson Education, 2007 6. Robert E.Colin, 2ed “Foundations for Microwave Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2001 7. Reinhold.Ludwig and Pavel Bretshko “RF Circuit Design”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2006 11.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 38: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 52 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1609

FUNDAMENTALS OF FUZZY LOGIC AND ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS

L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE, ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To comprehend the concepts of biological neuron and the learning algorithms x

To study the various methodologies to train the multi-hop network x To acquire knowledge about SOM and special networks

x To study the basic principles of fuzzy logic and fuzzy operators x To understand the concept of fuzzy logic controller and its applications

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF ANN 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Biological Neuron structure, ANN - Definition – Topology - Models - Learning strategies. Characteristics of ANN - Different Learning Rules - Activation dynamics - Synaptic dynamics - Perceptron Model (Both Single & Multi Layer) - Training Algorithm - Linear Separability Limitation and Its Over Comings, Problems in perceptron weight adjustments

UNIT 2 MULTI LAYER NETWORKS 9 Hrs.

BPN - Training - Architecture-Algorithm, Counter Propagation Network - Training - Architecture, BAM - Training-stability analysis, Adaptive Resonance Theory - ART1- ART2 – Architecture -Training, Hop Field Network - Energy Function - Discrete - Continuous - Algorithm - Application - TSP .

UNIT 3 SOM & SPECIAL NETWORKS 9 Hrs. SOM-Introduction - Kohonan SOM - Linear vector quantization, Probabilistic neural network ,Cascade

correlation, General Regression neural network, Cognitron - Application of ANN - Texture classification - Character recognition.

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC 9 Hrs. Classical set - Operations and properties - Fuzzy Set - Operations and properties - Problems, Classical

Relations - Operations and Properties, Fuzzy Relations - Operations and Properties - Compositions Membership function -FLCS - Need for FLC- Fuzzification - Defuzzification.

UNIT 5 FLCS, CLASSIFICATION & APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Fuzzy decision making -Types, Fuzzy Rule Based System, Knowledge Based System, Non linear Fuzzy Control system - Fuzzy Classification - Hard C Means - Fuzzy C Means. Applications of fuzzy - Water level controller, Fuzzy image Classification, Speed control of motor.

Max 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Timothy Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Application”, McGraw Hill, Edition 1997

2. James A. Freeman & Skapura, “Neural Networks”, Pearson Education, 2007.

3. B.Yegnanarayana, “Artificial Neural Networks” Prentice Hall, September 2007.

4. Simon Haykin, “Artificial Neural Networks”, Second Edition, Pearson Education.

5. Drainkov, H.Hallendoor and M.Reinfrank, “An Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Edition 2001.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 39: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 53 REGULATIONS 2015

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

SEE1106 CIRCUIT THEORY AND NETWORK ANALYSIS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge on the principles of analysis and synthesis of electrical networks. To impart knowledge on the analysis of two port networks.

UNIT 1 NETWORK THEOREMS (BOTH DC & AC) 12 Hrs. Superposition Theorem - Reciprocity Theorem - Thevenin’s Theorem - Norton’s Theorem - Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.

UNIT 2 NETWORK FUNCTION AND ITS PARAMETERS 12 Hrs.

Network Functions - Driving Point Impedance - Transfer Functions - Poles and Zeros, Significance of Poles and Zeros - Determination of Network Function of One Port and Two Port Network - Network Parameters - Z,Y, h and ABCD- Conditions for Reciprocity - Parameter Conversion.

UNIT 3 TWO PORT NETWORKS 12 Hrs.

Image Parameters - Iterative Parameter - Image and Iterative Parameters in terms of Open Circuit and Short Circuit Network - Parameters of Important Networks - Lattice Network - T Network ,π Network - Twin Network - Network Conversions - Bartlett’s Bisection Theorem and its Application - Interconnection of Two Port Networks.

UNIT 4 SYNTHESIS OF LC, RL AND RC NETWORK 12 Hrs.

Hurwitz polynomial - Routh Criterion - Positive Real function - Elementary Synthesis Procedure - Properties of LC, RC, and RL Driving Point Functions - Synthesis of LC, RC, RL and RLC Network using Foster and Cauer Forms - Constant Resistance Network - Synthesis of Transfer Admittance and Transfer Impedance with a One ohm Termination.

UNIT 5 FILTERS, ATTENUATORS AND EQUALIZERS 12 Hrs.

Filters - Constant K - Low Pass Filter - High Pass Filter - Band Pass Filter - Band Stop Filter - m-Derived Filters - Terminating Half Section - Composite Filter, Attenuators-Design of Attenuators, Equalizers -Design of Equalizers.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Sudhakar and Shyam mohan Palli, Circuits and Networks; Analysis and Synthesis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. John.D.Ryder, Networks Lines and Fields, 2nd Edition, PHI Publications, 2003.

3. Kuo, ’Network Analysis and Synthesis’, 2nd Edition, PHI, 1995.

4. Soni and Gupta,’ Electric Circuits and Analysis’, 5th Edition, Dhanpatrai and Sons, 1995.

5. Umesh Sinha, ‘Network Analysis and Synthesis’, 5th Edition, Sathya Prakashan Publishers, 1985.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 20% Theory & 80 % Numerical)

Page 40: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 54 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1107 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND NETWORKS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE and EIE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge on the fundamental principles on analysis of Electrical circuits and two port networks.

UNIT 1 D.C. and AC CIRCUITS 12 Hrs.

Electrical Quantities, Ohm’s Law, Resistors - Series and parallel Combinations, Kirchhoff’s Laws, Node and Mesh Analysis - Sinusoidal Functions - RMS(effective) and Average Values - Phasor Representation - J operator - Sinusoidal Excitation Applied to Purely Resistive - Inductive and Capacitive Circuits - RL - RC and RLC Series and Parallel Circuits.

UNIT 2 NETWORK THEOREMS (BOTH DC & AC) 12 Hrs. Superposition Theorem - Reciprocity Theorem - Thevenin’s Theorem - Norton’s Theorem - Maximum power transfer Theorem.

UNIT 3 NETWORK TOPOLOGY 12 Hrs.

Network Topology - Basic concepts of Graph theory, Network Graph, Tree, Incidence & Reduced Incidence Matrices, Cut sets, Tie sets, Cut set schedule, Tie set schedule - Application to network solutions - Duality and Dual Networks.

UNIT 4 NETWORK FUNCTION AND ITS PARAMETERS 12 Hrs.

Network Functions - Driving point Impedance - Transfer Functions- Network Parameters - Z,Y, h and ABCD-Parameter Conversion Parameters of Important Networks - Lattice Network - T Network and π Network - Twin Network -Network Conversions - Bartlett’s Bisection Theorem and its Application - Interconnection of Two Port Networks.

UNIT 5 TRANSIENTS AND RESONANCE CIRCUITS 12 Hrs. Time Domain Analysis - Transient Response of RL, RC & RLC networks with DC Input and Sinusoidal AC Input- Series and Parallel Resonance - Frequency Response - Quality Factor and Bandwidth.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Sudhakar and Shyam Mohan Palli, Circuits and Networks; Analysis and Synthesis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. John.D.Ryder, Networks Lines and Fields, 2nd Edition, PHI Publications, 2003.

3. Hayt W. H, Jack Kemmerly, Steven Durbin‘”Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 8th illustrated edition, 2011.

4. Kuo, ’Network Analysis and Synthesis’, 2nd Edition, PHI, 1995.

5. Soni and Gupta,’Electric Circuits and Analysis’, 5th Edition, Dhanpatrai and Sons, 1995.

6. Umesh Sinha, ‘Network Analysis and Synthesis’, 5th Edition, Sathya Prakashan Publishers, 1985.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 20% Theory & 80 % Numerical)

Page 41: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 55 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1202 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE,EEE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on the concepts of Electro-magnetic field which is essential for understanding the working principle, design and analysis of Electrical machines and Systems.

UNIT 1 ELECTRIC FIELDS 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Concepts of Different Co-Ordinate Systems - Coulomb’s Law, Electric Field Intensity, Electric Field due to Point Charge, Line Charge, Surface Charge and Volume Charge Distributions - Electric Flux Density - Gauss Law - Application of Gauss Law - Electric Potential - Potential Gradient - Divergence and Divergence Theorem - Poisson’s and Laplace equation.

UNIT 2 CONDUCTORS AND DIELECTRICS 9 Hrs.

Field due to Dipoles - Dipole Moment - Boundary Conditions at Dielectric and Conductor Surfaces - Capacitor and Capacitance of a System of Conductors - Energy Stored and Energy Density - Capacitance due to Spherical Shell, Coaxial cable and Two Wire Transmission Line - Electrostatic Potential Energy Associated with Different Charges.

UNIT 3 MAGNETIC FIELDS 9 Hrs.

Current and Current Density - Conduction and Convection Current - Force on a Current Element - Biot-Savart’s law - Force between Current Carrying Conductors - Torque on Closed Conductors - Ampere’s Law-Magnetic Flux Density - Curl and Stokes Theorem - Magnetic Vector Potential - Boundary Condition at the Magnetic surfaces.

UNIT 4 FARADAY’S LAWS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 9 Hrs. Faradays’ Laws - Self and Mutual Inductance - Inductance of Solenoids, Toroids, Transmission Lines and Cables - Energy Stored and Density in Magnetic Circuits.

UNIT 5 MAXWELL’S EQUATION AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9 Hrs.

Concept of Displacement and Conduction Current - Modified Ampere’s Circuital Law - Maxwell’s Equations in point and Integral Forms - Wave Equations - Plane Waves in Free Space - Polarization - Poynting’s Theorem and Poynting Vector and its Significance - Energy in Electromagnetic Field.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. K.A. Gangadhar, “Electromagnetic Field Theory (Including Antenna Wave Propagation”, Khanna Publisher New Delhi, 2009.

2. Karl.E.Lonngren, Sava.V.Savov, “Fundamentals of Electromagnetics with MATLAB”, PHI, 2005.

3. William Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, Tata McGraw - Hill, New York, 7th Edition, 2006,

4. R.Meenakumari & R.Subasri, “Electromagnetic Felds”, New Age International Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2007.

5. E.C.Jordan & K.G.Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves & Radiating Systems”, Prentice- Hall, 2006.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 42: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 56 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1203 CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE, ETCE, ECE, EIE and E&C) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study and familiarize the basic concepts of system design and analysis of system in different domains To analyse the time response of system in steady state

To impart knowledge about stability analysis and design of compensators

UNIT 1 SYSTEM CONCEPTS 14 Hrs.

Types of System - Open Loop Systems, Closed Loop Systems, Basic Elements in Control System - Mathematical Models of Physical System: Differential Equation- Transfer Functions of Single Input, Single Output and Multi Variable Systems - Simple Electrical Networks, Electrical Analogous of Mechanical Translational and Rotational System - D.C and A.C Servomotor - Mechanical System- Translational and Rotational System - Block Diagram Reduction Techniques - Signal Flow Graphs - Mason’s Gain Formula.

UNIT 2 TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS OF CONTROL SYSTEMS 10 Hrs. Standard Test Signals -Time Response of First and Second Order System, Time Domain- Specifications - Generalized Error Series - Steady State Error - Static and Dynamic Error Constants.

UNIT 3 STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM 12 Hrs. Characteristics Equation - Location of Roots in S Plane for Stability - Routh Hurwitz Criterion - Root Locus Analysis - Effect of Pole Zero Additions on Root Locus - Nyquist Stability Criterion.

UNIT 4 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Frequency Response of the System - Correlation between Time and Frequency Response - Gain and Phase Margin - Bode Plot - Nyquist Plot (Polar Plot).

UNIT 5 COMPENSATION AND CONTROLLERS 12 Hrs. Introduction to compensation networks - Lag, Lead and Lag Lead networks - Effect of providing Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead compensation on system performance and design using bode plot - P, PI, PID Controllers design.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. I.J.Nagarath and M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering” New Age International (p) Limited Publishers, 2nd edition, 2009.

2. Kausuhio Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India PVT. Ltd, 5th edition.

3. Richard Dorf, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education Ltd, 11th Edition 2009.

4. M.N. Bandyo padhyay, “Control Engineering, Theory and Practice” PHI, 4th print, 2006.

5. N.K.Sinha, “Control Systems”, New Age International Private Limited Publishers, 3rd Edition, 1998, reprint 2004.

6. A.Nagoorkani, “Control System”, RBA Publications, 2nd edition, repnit 1998.

7. U.A.Bakshi and S.C.Goyal, “Control System Engineering”, Technical Publication, 2nd Revised reprint 2007.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 30% Theory & 70 % Numerical)

Page 43: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 57 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1204 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the fundamental principles of Electrical machines using the concepts of electro-mechanical energy conversion. To acquaint the constructional details, the principle of operation and prediction of performance characteristics of D.C Machines and Transformers.

To study about the various losses and different testing methods to determine the performance of D.C Machines and Transformers.

UNIT 1 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL CONVERSION 9 Hrs. Introduction - Principles of Energy Conversion - Field Energy and Co-energy in Linear Systems - Energy Flow -

Losses and Efficiency - Singly and Multiply Excited Magnetic Field Systems - Torque Production in Rotating Machines - General Analysis of Electromechanical system

UNIT 2 D.C. GENERATORS 9 Hrs. Constructional Details - Principle of Operation - E.M.F Equation - Methods of Excitation - Types - No load &

Load characteristics of Series, Shunt & Compound generators - Armature Reaction, Effects, Methods of Compensation - Commutation : Methods of Improving Commutation - Applications.

UNIT3 D.C. MOTORS AND TESTING OF D.C. MACHINES 9 Hrs. Principle of Operation - Back E.M.F & Torque Equation - Characteristics of Series, Shunt & Compound Motors -

Starters - Speed Control of DC Series & Shunt Motors - Electrical Braking - Testing of DC Machines - Brake Test, Swinburne’s Test & Hopkinson’s Test .

UNIT 4 TRANSFORMERS 9 Hrs. Principle of Operation - Constructional Details - E.M.F. Equation - Transformation Ratio - Transformer on No

Load - Parameters Referred to HV / LV Windings - Equivalent Circuit - Transformer On Load - Phasor diagram - Regulation - Testing of Transformer - Open Circuit and Short Circuit Test - All day Efficiency - Sumpner’s Test.

UNIT 5 SPECIAL TRANSFORMERS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Auto Transformer - Saving of copper in comparison with Two winding Transformer - Parallel Operation of Single Phase Transformers - Construction of Three Phase Transformer - Transformer Connections - Scott connection - Three Phase to Single Phase Transformer conversion - Elementary Ideas on Instrument Transformers and Toroidal Transformer.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. A K Theraja & B L Thereja, “A Text book of Electrical Technology “ ( Vol II) S Chand & Co- 23 rd Edition 2008. 2. I J Nagrath and D P Kothari , “Electrical Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007..

3. R.K.Rajput, “Electrical Machine”, Laxmi Publications, 5th Edition 2008. 4. J.B. Gupta, “Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines”, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Reprint 2010. 5. S K Sen, “Electrical Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Reprint 2002. 6. Theodore Wildi, Electrical Machines, Drives and Power Systems, Pearson, 6th Ed, 2007.

7. Irving Kosow, Electric Machinery and Transformers, Pearson, 2nd Ed, 2007. 8. Albert E. Clayton and NN Hancock, “The performance and Design of Direct Current Machines”, Oxford and IBH.Publishing

Co. Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 1990.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

(Distribution may be 70% Theory and 30% Numerical)

Page 44: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 58 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1205 AC MACHINES ___ L ______________________ T

P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) _______________________ 3 __ 0 __ 0 ____ 3 _______ 100 __

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge on construction and performance of salient and non - salient type synchronous generators.

To study the principle of operation and performance of synchronous motor.

To familiarize on performance, starting and speed control of three-phase induction motors.

To study the working principle of various single-phase induction motors.

UNIT 1 SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS 10 Hrs. Constructional features - EMF Equation - Armature Reaction - Synchronous Reactance - Voltage Regulation -

Synchronous Impedance Method - MMF and Potier Methods - Synchronising & Parallel Operation - Two Reaction Theory - Determination of Xd and Xq (Slip test).

UNIT 2 SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 9 Hrs.

Principle of Operation - Starting Methods - Effect of Increased Load with Constant Excitation - Effect of Changing Excitation on Constant Load - Different Torque - Power flow equation - Phasor diagram - V and inverted V curves - Hunting and suppression methods.

UNIT 3 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS 9 Hrs. Construction - Types of 3- Phase Induction Motors - Rotating Magnetic Fields - Torque Equation - Condition for

Maximum Torque - Slip, Torque Slip Characteristics - Power Stages in Induction Motors - Losses and Efficiency - Plugging - Cogging and Crawling - Concept of Induction Generator.

UNIT 4 CIRCLE DIAGRAM AND CONTROL METHODS OF 3- PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR 9 Hrs. No load and Blocked rotor tests - Equivalent circuit - Construction of Circle diagram - Starting methods - Speed control - Double cage Induction motor.

UNIT 5 SINGLE PHASE AC MOTORS 8 Hrs. Double Field Revolving Theory - Types of Single Phase Induction Motor - Equivalent Circuit (Qualitative) - Repulsion Motor - Series Motor - Universal motor, AC Servomotor, Linear Induction Motor, Hysteresis motor.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. A K Theraja & B L Thereja, “A Text book of Electrical Technology ( Vol II)”, S Chand & Co- 23 rd Edition 2008.:

2. I J Nagrath and D P Kothari, “Electrical Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.

3. R.K.Rajput, “Electrical Machine”, Laxmi Publications, 5th Edition 2008.

4. J.B. Gupta, “Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines”, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Reprint 2010

5. S K Sen, “Electrical Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Reprint 2002

6. A Fitzgerald, C Kingsley, S Umans, Electrical Machinary, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private Limited, 6th Ed, 2002

7. M.G.Say,”Performance & Design A.C. Machines” CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2005

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 70% Theory and 30% Numerical)

Page 45: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 59 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1206 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand electric power transmission system.

To understand electric power distribution system.

Types and methods of power transmission and distribution.

To measure performance of transmission and distribution system.

UNIT 1 STRUCTURE OF ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Single Line Diagram - Distributors with Concentrated and Uniform Loading - DC Two Wire and Three Wire Systems - AC Distributors - Radial and Ring Distributors - Interconnectors - Electrical Layout & Bus Bar Arrangement in Generating Sub Stations and Bulk Power Substation - Kelvin’s Law for the Design of Feeders and its Limitations.

UNIT 2 TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS 12 Hrs.

Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance of Single Phase and Three Phase (Including Double Circuits) Transmission Lines - Stranded and Bundled Conductors - Symmetrical and Unsymmetrical Spacing - Transposition - Application of Self and Mutual GMD - Skin and Proximity Effect - Inductive Interference with Neighboring Circuits - Corona - Factors Affecting Corona - Advantages and Disadvantages of Corona - Methods of Reducing Corona Effect.

UNIT 3 PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES 12 Hrs. Equivalent Circuits for Short, Medium (π and T circuits) and Long Lines - Efficiency and Regulation -

Attenuation Constant, Phase Constant, Surge Impedance and Surge Impedance Loading - Real and Reactive Power

Flows in Lines - Power Circle Diagrams for Receiving and Sending Ends - Voltage Control of Lines - Ferranti Effect UNIT

4 INSULATORS, CABLES AND OVERHEAD LINES 12 Hrs.

Insulators - Types and Construction - Voltage Distribution in String Insulator - string Efficiency - Methods of Improving String Efficiency - Cables - types - Capacitance of Cables - Insulation Resistance - Dielectric Stress and Grading - Dielectric Loss - Thermal Characteristics - capacitance of Three Core Cables - Stress and Sag Calculations - Effect of Wind and Ice - Supports at Different Levels - stinging Chart.

UNIT 5 RECENT TRENDS IN TRANSMISSION 12 Hrs.

Extra High Voltage AC (EHVAC) Transmission - Need, Advantages, Limitations -High Voltage Direct current Transmission (HVDC) - Terminal Equipment for HVDC Systems - Classifications, Advantages, Limitations - Economic Distance for HVDC - Comparison of EHVAC and HVDC Transmission -Interconnection of HVDC & AC Systems - Introduction to FACTS Technology -SVC,TCSC,STATCOM ,UPFC.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 12. C. L . Wadhwa, “Electrical Power Sytems”, 6th edition, New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2010. 13. V. K. Metha & Rohit Metha,”Principles of Power System”, S. Chand, 3rd edition, 2006. 14. S. L. Uppal, Electrical Power, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2006. 15. Chakrabarti. A, Soni M I, Gupta P V, “Textbook on power system engineering”, Dhanpat Rai & Co,2008. 16. S.N.Singh, “Electric Power Generation, Transmission & Distribution”, Prentice Hall of India, New Edition, New Delhi, 2008. 17. Soni, Bhatnagar and Gupta,” Electrical Power”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2006.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 60% Theory and 40% Numerical)

Page 46: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 60 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1301 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To gain knowledge in designing of State Space Analysis To have an clear understanding in Digital Data Systems

To have an exposure in different stability analysis of Nonlinear Systems

UNIT 1 STATE SPACE MODEL 11 Hrs. Introduction to State Space, State Variables, Physical Variables, Phase Variables-Matrices, Eigen Values and

Eigen vectors - Diagonalization, Canonical and Jordan forms - State Space Models from Differential Equations - Conversion of State Variable Models to Transfer Function

UNIT 2 MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Computation of State Transition Matrix - Laplace Transformation Method, Canonical Transformation - Cayley Hamilton Theorem-Solution of State Equation.

UNIT 3 STATE FEEDBACK AND OBSERVERS 10 Hrs. Concepts of Controllability and Observability - Design of State Space Feedback using Pole Placement Technique-State Observers.

UNIT 4 SAMPLED DATA SYSTEMS 15 Hrs.

Introduction to Digital Control - Discrete Time Signals - Sampling Process - Analysis of Sampling Process in the Frequency Domain - Spectral Representation - Analyzing - Shannon’s Sampling Theorem - Reconstruction of Sampled Signals using Hold Circuits - Zero Order Hold - its Representation - Bode Plot of Hold Circuit - Z - Transform of Sampled Signals - Theorems on Z- Transform - Inverse Z-transform - Mapping between s and z Planes - Pulse Transfer Function Impulse Response - Closed Loop Operation - Characteristic Equations - Jury’s Stability Criterion.

UNIT 5 NONLINEAR SYSTEMS 15 Hrs. General Properties of Non-Linear Systems - Describing Function Method - On / Off, Dead Zone, Saturation and

Hysteresis Non Linearities - Determination of Limit Cycle by Describing Function - Stability of Limit Cycle - System Stability in the Sense of Lyapunov - Lyapunov’s Direct Method - Stability and Instability Theorems - Application of Lyapunov Method for Linear Systems - Basic Concepts of Phase Plane Method.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. K.Ogata, “Modern control Engineering”, 5th Edition. Prentice Hall India, New Delhi. 2010.

2. B.C.Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Phi learning Pvt Ltd, 9th Edition, 2009.

3. Philips C.L., & John Parr “Feedback Control Systems” 5th Edition, Prentice Hall International. 2010.

4. Naresh K. Sinha, “Control Systems’’, New Age International Ltd., Reprint 2004.

5. Stanley M.Shinners, “Modern Control System Theory and Design”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons. 1998.

6. M.Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.

7. Roy Choudhry, “Modern Control Engineering” Phi Learning, 2009

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 30% Theory & 70 % Numerical)

Page 47: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 61 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1302 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge in modelling of power system elements To implement Numerical methods in power flow problem To analyze the system in various faulted conditions.

To have a knowledge in stability and security of power systems

UNIT 1 POWER SYSTEM MODELING 14 Hrs. Need for system analysis in planning and operation of power system - per phase analysis of symmetrical

three-phase system. General aspects relating to power flow, short circuit and stability analysis - Modeling of generator, load, shunt capacitor, transmission line, shunt reactor for short circuit, power flow and stability studies - per unit representation - bus admittance by analytical method and direct inspection method.

UNIT 2 POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 10 Hrs.

Problem definition - bus classification - derivation of power flow equation - solution by Gauss Seidel and Newton Raphson methods by polar form - P V bus adjustments for both methods - computation of slack bus power, line flow and transmission loss.

UNIT 3 SYMMETRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Need for short circuit study - Bus impedance matrix formation - Symmetrical short circuit analysis using Z-bus. - computations of short circuit capacity, post fault voltage and current.

UNIT 4 UNSYMMETRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Symmetrical component transformation - sequence impedances.- Sequence Networks - unsymmetrical short

circuit analysis for single line fault , line to line fault and double line to ground fault using Z-bus - computations of short circuit capacity, post fault voltage and current.

UNIT 5 STABILITY & SECURITY ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Distinction between steady state and transient state - Concepts of Stability & Security - Swing equation-solution to swing equation - step by step method - power angle equation - equal area criterion - critical clearing angle and time. Stability analysis of single machine connected to infinite bus by modified Euler’s method - Multi-machine stability analysis using Runge Kutta method.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. John J. Grainger and Stevenson Jr. W.D., “Power System Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

2. Kothari .D.P and Nagarath .I.J, , “Power system Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

3. Stagg, G.W. and El-Abaid, A. H. “Computer Methods in Power System Analysis”, McGraw-Hill International Book Company, 1994.

4. Nagarath, I.J., and Kothari, D.P., “Modern Power System Analysis”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 2003.

5. Hadi Saadat, “Power system Analysis”, 2nd Revised Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 2009.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 40% Theory & 60 % Numerical)

Page 48: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 62 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1303 POWER GENERATION AND UTILIZATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To Understand the general power generation concepts To Understand the general electrical utilization concepts

To study the performance and efficiency of power generation

UNIT 1 CONVENTIONAL POWER PLANTS 10 Hrs.

Layout and working of diesel, steam, low and high head power plants-pumped storage plants-principle of nuclear power generation - types and layouts of nuclear reactors- boiling water reactor- advanced gas cooled reactor- fast breeder reactor - reactor control - waste disposal.

UNIT 2 ECONOMICS OF GENERATION 8 Hrs. Introduction-Definitions-Load Duration Curve-Number and size of Generator Units-Base Load and Peak Load Plants-Cost of Electrical Energy-Fixed cost-Running Cost of Energy-Tariff or Charge to Consumer

UNIT 3 ILLUMINATION 10 Hrs. Nature of radiation - definition-laws-lighting calculations-polar curves-Rousseau construction- design of

Illumination Systems-Flood Lighting and Calculations-Street Lighting-Classification of Light Sources-Incandescent lamps- gas discharge lamps- sodium vapour, mercury vapour, Fluorescent Lamps and LED lamps.

UNIT 4 HEATING AND WELDING 8 Hrs. Introduction - methods of heating - design of heating element- resistance, inductance, arc furnaces- high freq. dielectric heating- welding - types- resistance, arc welding- construction and its characteristics.

UNIT 5 ELECTRIC TRACTION 9 Hrs.

Introduction - requirements of an ideal traction Train Movement-Speed-Time Curve- mechanics of train movement - tractive effort calculations- Power and energy output from driving axles-Traction motors and its Characteristics-Traction motor control-Electric braking-Current collection systems

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. C.L.Wadhwa, “Generation, Distribution & Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Wiley Eastern Ltd, New Delhi, 1993.

2. Uppal.S.L. “Electrical Power”, Khanna Publishers, 9th Edition, 2001.

3. Starr A.T., “Generation, Transmission and Utilisation of Electric Power”, ELBS, 1978.

4. Soni Bhatnagar & Gupta, “ A Course in Electrical Power”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons 1996

5. Openshaw Taylor, “Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Oriented Longmans Ltd, (Revised in SI Units) 1981, SI Edition.

6. Er.R.K.Rajput, “Utilization of Electrical power”, Laxmi Publications,2006.’

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 49: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 63 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1304 ELECTRICAL MACHINE DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the mmf calculations for air gap and iron paths of rotating machines To design the armature and field for dc machines

To design the core and windings and cooling systems for transformers

To design the stator and rotor for induction machines and synchronous machines

UNIT 1 BASIC CONCEPTS OF DESIGN 12 Hrs. Major considerations in Machine design - Limitations in design - Standard specifications - Electrical Engineering

materials - High conductivity materials - Insulating materials - Magnetic circuit calculations - mmf for airgap and iron path - real and apparent flux densities in rotating machines - Choice of specific electric and magnetic loadings.

UNIT 2 DC MACHINES 14 Hrs.

Output equation - Main Dimensions - Choice of number of poles - Armature design - Estimation of number of conductors / turns - Coils armature slots- Conductor dimensions - Slot dimension - Design of field poles and field coil (shunt field) - Design of Commutators and Brushes

UNIT 3 TRANSFORMERS 12 Hrs. Output equation - Design of core and winding of single phase shell and core type transformer and three phase transformers -Temperature rise in transformers - Design of tank, cooling tubes and Ducts

UNIT 4 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MACHINES 12 Hrs. Output equation, Main dimensions, Design of stator, Choice of L/D ratio - Air gap length - Design of rotor - squirrel cage and slip ring rotor.

UNIT 5 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 10 Hrs.

Output equation - Design of salient pole rotor machine - Dimensions - Short circuit ratio - Effect of Short Circuit ratio - Air gap length - Armature design - Slot dimensions - Rotor design - Design of damper winding - Design of cylindrical rotors

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. A.K.Sawhney, A.Chakrabarti, “A course in Electrical machine Design”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 6th Edition, 2006..

2. Albert E. Clayton and NN Hancock, “The performance and Design of Direct Current Machines”, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 1990.

3. A.Nagoorkani, “Electrical Machine Design”, RBA Publications, 2nd Edition, 2000. 4. R.K.Agarval, “Principles of Electrical Machine Design”, Reprint 2002, S.K.Kataria & Sons, 4th Edition.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 50: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 64 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1305 POWER ELECTRONICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE, ECE, EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the various applications of electronic devices for conversion and control of the electrical power.

UNIT 1 POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9 Hrs. Overview of V-I characteristics of switching devices - Switching characteristics of Power Diode, BJT power

MOSFETS, IGBT and Thyristor - SCR Protection circuits - Thyristor Turn-ON methods - firing circuits - Commutation techniques.

UNIT 2 PHASE CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS 10 Hrs. Principle of phase controlled converter operation - single phase half wave converter, semi converter & full

converter with R, RL & RLE load - Freewheeling diode - Inverter operation of full converter - Three phase Semi converter & full converter with RL load.

UNIT 3 DC & AC CHOPPERS 9 Hrs. DC - DC Chopper: Principle of operation of Step down and step up choppers - Control Strategies - One, Two and Four quadrant operation.

AC - AC Chopper: Single phase AC voltage controllers with R & RL load - Multistage sequence control. Single phase step up and step down cycloconverters.

UNIT 4 INVERTERS 9 Hrs. Principle of operation: Single phase half bridge & full bridge voltage source inverters - Three phase Voltage

source inverters (120° and 180° mode) - Single phase current source inverter. PWM techniques: Single pulse PWM, Sinusoidal PWM, Modified sinusoidal PWM and multiple PWM

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS 8 Hrs. SMPS: Flyback and Push Pull - UPS: Redundant and Non-Redundant - HVDC Transmission systems -Single phase full converter fed DC drives - Inverters for standalone photovoltaic systems.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics circuits Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2013

2. P.S.Bimbhra, “Power Electronics”, Khanna Publishers, 4rd Edition, 2003

3. P.C.Sen, “ Power Electronics”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company, New Delhi, 1987.

4. M.D.Singh and K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics” TMH, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2008.

5. Dubey G.K., Doradla S.R., Joshi A and Sinha R.M., “Thyristorised Power Controllers” - Wiley Eastern Limited 1986.

6. Ned Mohan, “ Power Electronics”, 2nd Edition, 2001.

7. Rashid M.H , Power electronics hank book, Academics press publications., 2nd Edition, 2007

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 90% Theory & 10% Numerical)

Page 51: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 65 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1306 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND CONTROL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the operations of electrical machines controlled by power electronic converters and its

applications.

UNIT 1 DRIVES CHARACTERISTICS 8 Hrs.

Electric drives - Advantages - choice of electric drive, Speed/Torque Characteristics of various types of loads and drive motors, Classes of motor duty- selection of power rating for drive motors with regard to duty. Thermal model of motor for heating and cooling, Overloading and load variation factors- load equalization.

UNIT 2 DC DRIVE 10 Hrs.

Starting and braking operations of dc motor drive-Speed control of DC motors - Ward Leonard scheme - Drawbacks - Ward Leonard Ilgener scheme - Thyristor converter fed DC Drives: single, two and four quadrant operations. Chopper fed DC Drives: control strategies - single, two and four quadrant operation.

UNIT 3 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 10 Hrs.

Speed control of three phase induction motors: Stator control - Stator voltage, frequency and voltage/frequency control - VSI,CSI and Cycloconverter fed induction motor drives. Rotor control : Rotor resistance control- Static control of rotor resistance using DC Chopper, slip power recovery schemes -Kramer and Scherbius drives

UNIT 4 THREE PHASE SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES 10 Hrs.

Speed control of three phase synchronous motors - types of control , Voltage source and current source converter fed synchronous motors -Cycloconverter fed synchronous motors -Commutatorless DC motor- Effects of harmonics on the performance of AC motors -Closed loop control of drive motors, Marginal angle control and power factor control.

UNIT 5 DIGITAL CONTROL AND DRIVE APPLICATIONS 7 Hrs. Control of electric drives using microprocessor - Selection of drives and control schemes for steel rolling mills, Paper mills, textile mills and cranes.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gopal K. Dubey, “ Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives”, Prentice Hall, 1989.

2. Gopal K. Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Alpha Science International Ltd, 2002.

3. Vedam.Subrahmanyam “Electric Drives” Mc graw hill, second edition 2011.

4. Electrical drives by Krishnana(PHI).

5. Control of electrical Drives by w.Leonhard(Springer 2001).

6. Vedam Subramanyam, “Thyristor control of Electric Drives”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi 1991.

7. S.K.Pillai, “ A First Course on Electrical Drives”, New age international Publishers Pvt Ltd,1989,Reprint 2004.

8. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics circuits Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2009.

9. B.K.Bose, “Power Electronic & AC drives”, Prentice Hall, 2006.

10. http://ecmweb.com/power-quality/effects-harmonics-power- systems.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 90% Theory & 10 % Numerical)

Page 52: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 66 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1307 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the concepts of stepper motors and its applications

To study the operating principle and characteristics of switched reluctance motors

To impart knowledge on the fundamental concepts and control of permanent magnet brushless DC motors

To introduce the concepts and control methods of permanent magnet brushless synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors.

UNIT 1 STEPPING MOTORS 9 Hrs.

Constructional features, principle of operation, types, modes of excitation, Torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepping motor, Static and Dynamic characteristics, Introduction to Drive circuits for stepper motor, suppressor circuits, Closed loop control of stepper motor- Applications.

UNIT 2 SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS 9 Hrs.

Principle of Operation, Constructional features, Torque equation, Power Semi Conductor Switching Circuits, frequency of variation of inductance of each phase winding - Control circuits of SRM-Torque - Speed Characteristics, Microprocessor based control of SRM Drive, Applications.

UNIT 3 SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTORS 8 Hrs. Constructional features: axial and radial air gap Motors. Operating principle, reluctance torque - Phasor diagram, Speed torque characteristics, Applications.

UNIT 4 PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MOTORS 9 Hrs. Commutation in DC motors, Electronic Commutation- Difference between mechanical and electronic

commutators- Hall sensors, Optical sensors, Construction and principle of PMBL DC Motor, Torque and E.M.F equation, Torque-speed characteristics, Power Controllers-Drive Circuits, Applications.

UNIT 5 PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 10 Hrs.

Construction and types, Principle of operation, EMF and Torque equation, Phasor diagram- Torque Speed Characteristics, Power controllers- Self control, Vector control, Microprocessor based Control, Applications.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Miller, T.J.E. “Brushless permanent magnet and reluctance motor drives”, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.

2. Kenjo.T, “Stepping motors and their microprocessor control”, Oxford University Press, 1995.

3. R.Krishnan, “Electric Motor Drives - Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

4. Kenjo.T and Naganori, S “Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC motors”, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.

5. B.K. Bose, “Modern Power Electronics & AC drives”, Dorling Kindersley India, 2006.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 53: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 67 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1401 POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To discuss the cause and effect of abnormal operating conditions in a Power system and the protective

schemes along with the problems associated with circuit interruptions.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION DRIVES 8 Hrs. Essential requirements of protection - nature and causes of faults - types of faults - effects of faults - zones of protection - protection schemes - CTs and PTs and their applications - Basic relay terminology.

UNIT 2 PROTECTIVE RELAYS 10 Hrs.

Electromagnetic relays - operating principle - torque equation - relay characteristics - over current relay, directional relay, distance relay, differential relay, negative sequence relay, amplitude and phase comparator of over current static relays, duality between comparators. Microprocessor based over current relay.

UNIT 3 APPARATUS PROTECTION 9 Hrs. Protection of Generator- stator & rotor protection - Large Motor protection. Transformer protection - Bus bar protection - Transmission line protection.

UNIT 4 THEORY OF ARC QUENCHING 9 Hrs. Arcing phenomena - theory and methods of arc quenching - recovery voltage - restriking voltage - RRRV - resistance switching - current chopping - capacitive current breaking - Characteristics of fuses - HRC fuse.

UNIT 5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 9 Hrs. Classification of circuit breakers - air circuit breakers - oil circuit breakers - vacuum circuit breaker - SF6 circuit breakers - selection of circuit breakers - rating of circuit breakers - testing of circuit breakers.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Sunil S.Rao “Switchgear and protection”, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 2008.

2. Badri Ram and D.N.Vishwakarma “Power System Protection and Switchgear”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing, new Delhi, 2005.

3. S.L.Uppal, “Electrical Power”, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 1995.

4. Soni, Gupta and Bhatnagar “A Course in Electrical power”, Dhanpat Rai&sons, New Delhi, 2010.

5. TSM Rao, “Digital Numerical Relays”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing, New Delhi, 2005.

6. B.Ravindranath and N.Chander, “ Power System Protection and Switchgear”, New age International (P) Ltd, 2005.

7. Dr.N.Veerappan and Dr.S.R.KrishnaMurthy, “Power System Switchgear and Protection”,S.Chand,2009.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 54: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 68 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1402 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on the concepts of over voltages, dielectric breakdown mechanisms and to emphasis the need for generation, measurement and testing of High voltages and currents.

UNIT 1 OVERVOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Causes of Over voltages Theory and Mechanism of Lightining phenomenon - Overvoltage due to Switching Surges - Protection against over voltages - Reflection and Refraction of Travelling waves - Insulation Coordination.

UNIT 2 CONDUCTION AND BREAKDOWN IN DIELECTRICS 9 Hrs.

Ionization of gases and current growth - Townsend’s criterion for breakdown -Streamer theory of breakdown in gases. Paschen’s Law - Vaccum breakdown - Various mechanisms of breakdown in liquid dielectrics -Various processes of breakdown in solid dielectrics.

UNIT 3 GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS 9 Hrs. Generation of high DC voltages: Rectifier, Voltage doubler circuits, Cockroft Walton voltage multiplier circuit,

Van de Graffe generator - Generation of high AC voltage: cascaded transformers, resonant transformers- Generation of high frequency a.c. high voltage - Generation of impulse voltages: Standard impulse waveshapes, Marx Circuit - generation of switching surges - generation of impulse current - tripping and control of impulse generators.

UNIT 4 MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS 9 Hrs. High Resistance with series ammeter -Potential Divider - Generating Voltmeters - Capacitance Voltage

Transformer, Electrostatic Voltmeters - Sphere Gaps - Hall generator - Resistive Shunts -Rogowski coils - Cathode Ray Oscillographs for impulse measurement.

UNIT 5 TESTING OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS 9 Hrs. Testing of Insulators and Bushings - Testing of Isolators and Circuit Breakers - Testing of Cables - Testing of Transformers - Testing of Surge arresters - Radio Interference Measurements - Standards and Specifications.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. M. S. Naidu and V. Kamaraju, ‘High Voltage Engineering’, 5thEdition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.

2. E.Kuffel and M.Abdullah, “High Voltage Engineering” - Per gammon Press, Oxford, 1970.

3. C.L.WADHWA, “High Voltage Engineering” - New Age International (P) Ltd, Publishers, 2007

4. E.Kuffel and W.s. Zaengal, “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals”, 2nd Edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2000.

5. H.M.Ryam, “High voltage Engineering and testing”, 2nd Edition, 2001, IEEE power and energy series 32.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 55: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 69 REGULATIONS 2015

SIC1203 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge in the area of electrical and electronic instruments with the in-depth knowledge about the construction and the working of the instruments. To expose the student about measurement of voltage, current, resistance, inductance, capacitance, power, energy and data acquisition concepts

UNIT 1 BASIC MEASUREMENTS 9 Hrs. Methods of Measurement, Measurement System, Classification of instrument system, Functional Elements of

measurement system - Examples - Characteristics of instruments: Static characteristics - Dynamic characteristic Types of errors - sources of errors - methods of elimination - Analysis of data - Limiting errors - Relative limiting error - Combination of Quantities with limiting errors - Statistical treatment of data: Histogram, Mean, Measure of dispersion from the mean, Range, Deviation, Average deviation, Standard Deviation, Variance - Calibration and Standards - Process of Calibration.

UNIT 2 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS 10 Hrs. Units of voltage and current - principle of operation of D’Arsonval Galvanometer - principle, operation,

constructional details and comparison of the following: permanent magnet moving coil, permanent magnet moving iron, Dynamometer, Induction, thermal and rectifier type instruments, Power measurement - Voltmeter ammeter method, Ammeter voltmeter method, Electro-dynamic wattmeter - Low power factor wattmeter

UNIT 3 MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE, INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE 11 Hrs. Low Resistance: Kelvin's double bridge - Medium Resistance: Voltmeter Ammeter method - Substitution

method - Wheatstone bridge method. High Resistance: Megger - Direct deflection method - Megohm bridge method, Loss of Charge method - Earth resistance measurement. Introduction to A.C bridges Sources and Detectors in A.C. bridges. Measurement of Self Inductance: Maxwell's bridge - Hay's bridge, and Anderson's bridge. Measurement of Mutual Inductance: Heavy side M.I bridge - Measurement of Capacitance: Schering's bridge - Sauty's bridge, Measurement of frequency using Wien's bridge.

UNIT 4 ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS 9 Hrs. Fundamentals of Cathode Ray Oscilloscope: Block diagram, CRO probes, Delay line, types of Oscilloscopes.

Measurement of: Signal voltage, Current, Phase & Frequency using Lissajous patterns, Industrial applications of CRO. DC and AC voltmeter and Ammeter, Ohmmeter, Range Extension, Electronic Multimeters, Types of Voltmeters - Differential type, true RMS type, Vector voltmeter - Wave Analyzer, Spectrum Analyzer and Distortion Analyzer

UNIT 5 DATA ACQUISITION 8 Hrs. Introduction to ADC / DAC - Specifications, ADC Quantization Error, Types of ADC - Flash, Counter,

Successive Approximation, Dual-Slope types and Introduction to Delta-Sigma, Types of DAC - Weighted-Resistor, 2R ladder and PWM type, ADC and DAC Problems - Smart sensors.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sawhney A.K., “A Course in Electrical, Electronic measurement & Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai & sons,1 8th Edition, Reprint 2010 2. Doeblin E.O. “Measurement System Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2004. 3. Albert D. Helfrick & William. D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques”, PHI, 2003. 4. Chris Nadovich, ‘Synthetic Instruments Concepts and Applications’, Elsevier, 2005. 5. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, ‘Labview Advanced Programming Techniques’, CRC Press, Second Edition, 2007. 6. Rahman Jamal and Herbert Picklik, “LabVIEW - Applications and Solutions”, National Instruments Release ISBN 0130964239. 7. Gupta J.B., “A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, 12th Edition, Katson Publishing House , 2003.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

Page 56: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 70 REGULATIONS 2015

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 57: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 71 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC4055 CIRCUITS AND NETWORKS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Verification of KCL & KVL 2. Verification of Theven in’s & Norton’s Theorem

3. Series and Parallel Resonance

4. Constant K filters (both LPF & HPF)

5. M-Derived filters (both LPF & HPF) 6. Attenuators

7. Equalizers

8. Matching Networks

9. Twin T Network as Notch filter

10. Verification of reciprocity theorem 11. Verification of compensation theorem

12. Study of composite m-derived filters

SEC4062 ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Study of IC 741 2. Measurement of Op amp parameters

3. Inverting, Non Inverting amplifier, Integrator and Differentiator

4. Precision Rectifiers (HW & FW)

5. Filters (LPF & HPF) 6. A/D & D/A Converters

7. RC Phase Shift Oscillator

8. Astable Multivibrator Using IC 741

9. Schmitt Trigger

10. PLL as voltage multiplier 11. Astable Multivibrator using IC 555

12. Comparators

13. Wein’s Bridge Oscillator

14. Instrumentation Amplifier

Page 58: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 72 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC4063 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

DESIGNING, ASSEMBLING AND TESTING OF:

1. Generation and Detection of AM, DSB-SC /SSB.

2. Generation and Detection Frequency Modulation (FM).

3. Sampling & Time Division Multiplexing and Demultiplexing/ Frequency Division Multiplexing

4. Sampling & Time Division Multiplexing and Demultiplexing/ Frequency Division Multiplexing

5. Pulse Modulation-PAM/P WM/PPM. 6. Pulse code modulation /Delta Modulation,

7. Digital Modulation & Demodulation- ASK, PSK, QPSK, and FSK.

8. PLL, Frequency synthesizer

9. F amplifier / Frequency Mixer circuits. 10. Error control coding and Study of different Line coding methods.

11. Radiation pattern measurement of Omni directional Antennas and Radio Receiver measurements.

12. Study of spectrum analyzer.

SEC4067

MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB

L T P Credits Total Marks (For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

MICROPROCESSOR- 8085

1. Programs using Arithmetic Operations. 2. Programs for Code Conversions. 3. Largest, Smallest and Sorting of an Array (8085).

MICROCONTROLLER- 8051

1. Data Transfer Programs 2. Programs using Logical Instructions.

3. Programs using Boolean Instructions.

4. Reading and Writing on a Parallel Port.

5. Stepper Motor Controller. 6. Timer in Different Modes.

7. Serial Communication Implementation.

Page 59: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 73 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC4068 MICROPROCESSOR LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

I. PROGRAMS USING 8085 PROCESSOR 1. Programs for 8 bit Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division.

II. PROGRAMS USING 8086 PROCESSOR 1. Perform 32 Addition of two numbers. 2. Counting numbers of 1’s in word. 3. Arithmetic mean of Square of N Numbers.

4. Code Conversion – BCD to ASCII Conversion, ASCII to BCD Conversion. 5. Finding largest & smallest of given 16 bit Numbers. 6. To Sort given set of Numbers in Ascending & Descending Order. 7. Program using look up table Concept. 8. Matrix Manipulation – 16 bit addition

9. Perform LCM of two 16 bit numbers, GCD of four 16 bit numbers. 10. Generate Fibonacci Series, Factorial of given Numbers.

III. INTERFACING WITH 8086

1. Interfacing 8086 with Stepper motor. Use Step angle Calculation & rotate motor to a Specified angle. 2. Interface 8086 with DC motor & Control the Speed of the DC Motor using PWM. 3. Interface 8086 With ADC & display the digital input, Perform the resolution calculation and cross verify the

result. 4. Interface 8086 With DAC & display the following waveform in CRO.

a). Triangular b). Saw tooth c). Staircase

5. Interface 8086 with 7 segment display to display numbers as Characters.

6. Interface 8086 with LCD to display the name of the person.

SEC4072 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

VHDL DESIGN, SIMULATION, SYNTHESIS & FGPA IMPLEMENTATION OF 1. Logic gates 2. Adders and Subtractors 3. 4-bit multiplier 4. ALU

5. Flip Flops

VERILOG HDL DESIGN, SIMULATION, SYNTHESIS & FGPA IMPLEMENTATION OF 1. Logic gates 2. Adders and Subtractors 3. 4-bit multiplier 4. Flip Flops

5. Shift registers 6. Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters 7. Moore and Mealy FSM 8. RAM and ROM memories

9. 4-bit RISC CPU

Page 60: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 74 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC4074 MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL LAB ___ L___ T _ P_______________________________ Credits Total

Marks

(For ECE) ______________________ 0 __ 0 ___ 4 ____ 2 ________ 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

OPTICAL FIBER EXPERIMENTS

1. Measurement of DC Characteristics of optical sources (LED and LASER Diode)and optical Detectors (PIN Photo diode and Avalanche Photo diode)

2. Mode Characteristics of single mode optical Fibers (V number)

3. Measurement of Numerical Aperture, Attenuation, Connector and Bending losses in single mode and multimode optical fibers

4. Fiber optic Analog and Digital Link- frequency response (analog) and eye diagram (digital)

5. Optical digital filtering, splitting and combining

6. Optical Amplifiers

7. Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)

MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS

1. Reflex klystron characteristics 2. Gunn diode characteristics

3. Measurement of VSWR and impedance of unknown load

4. Measurement of dielectric constant

5. Study of power distribution in directional couplers and waveguide tees

6. Radiation pattern measurement of RF and microwave antennas (horn and patch antenna) 7. Characteristics of microstrip filters, couplers and power dividers

8. S parameter measurement of microstrip and waveguide components

SEC4092 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS AND LDIC LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB

1. Determination of Ripple factor, % of regulation of HWR with and without filter. 2. Determination of Ripple factor, % of regulation of FWR with and without filter. 3. Design of series voltage regulator and perform line and load regulation. 4. Design of various Biasing techniques for CE amplifier.

5. Design of RC Phase shift oscillator for a specified frequency.

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB

1. Design and construct using IC741

a). b). c). d). e).

Inverting Non-inverting Adder Schmitt Trigger Differentiator

2. Waveform Generators using IC741

a). Triangular wave generator

Page 61: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 75 REGULATIONS 2015

b). Square wave generator

Page 62: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 76 REGULATIONS 2015

c). Sine Wave generator 3. Design and construct PWM using IC 555 timer

4. Verify the Basic gates / Boolean function using logic gates.

5. To construct and study the working of RS flip-flop, D flip-flop, T flip-flop, JK flip-flop

6. Design a counter using suitable flip-flop (a) MOD Counter

(b). Ripple Counter

(c). Up- Down Counter

ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & L T P Credits Total Marks

SEE4052 ELECTRONIC DEVICES LAB 0 0 4 2 100

(For EEE)

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LAB 1. Verification of Kirchhoff’s laws 2. Verification of Theorems 3. Series and Parallel AC circuits 4. R-L and R-C Transients with DC Excitation

5. Series and Parallel Resonance 6. Clippers and Clampers

ELETRONIC DEVICES LAB 1. Characteristics of Semiconductor diode and Zener diodeto find static and dynamic resistance from the

characteristics 2. Characteristics of CB configuration

3. Characteristics of CE configuration 4. Drain and transfer characteristics of JFET. To obtain gain , transconductance ,amplification factor 5. Characteristics of SCR find holding current ,break over voltage, holding voltage 6. Characteristics of UJT find intrinsic standoff ratio, Peak voltage, valley voltage

7. Characteristics of LDR with illumination and without illumination 8. Voltage multiplier

SEE4092 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. OCC and load characteristics of separately excited dc shunt generator 2. Load characteristics of DC compound generator (Differential and Cumulative) 3. Load characteristics of DC compound motor (Differential and Cumulative) 4. Swinburne’s test on DC shunt motor 5. Hopkinson’s test.

6. Load test on single phase transformer 7. Regulation of Alternator by EMF and MMF method.

8. Load test on 3 Phase Alternator.

9. Synchronizing and parallel operation of three phase Alternator with infinite bus bar.

10. Brake load test on Three phase squirrel cage induction motor. 11. Equivalent circuit of Single phase Induction motor.

Page 63: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 77 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE4056 POWER SYSTEMS LAB ___ L __ T __ P __________ Credits

Total Marks

(For EEE) _____________________ 0__ 0 __ 4 _____ 2 _______ 100 __

1. Computation of Power System Components in Per Units. 2. Formulation of the bus admittance matrix by Direct inspection method

3. Formulation of the bus admittance matrix by Singular transformation method.

4. Formation of bus impedance matrix

5. Analysis of Daily Load Curve 6. Automatic Generation Control

7. Determination of Transmission line parameters

8. Numerical Integration of Swing equation.

9. Load flow solution using Gauss – Seidal method 10. Load flow solution using Newton – Rapson method

11. Fault analysis.

12. Characteristics of Microcontroller based Frequency relay

13. Construction of simple ladder program for Logic gates.

14. Applications of Delay Timers in PLC. 15. Applications of Counters in PLC.

SEE4057 POWER ELECTRONICS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. SCR Triggering Circuits 2. Single Phase Half & Fully Controlled Bridge Rectifier

3. SCR based series and Parallel Inverter

4. AC Regulator-Phase Control Using DIAC &TRIAC

5. Single phase Cycloconverters 6. MOSFET Based Buck & Boost Converter

7. IGBT Based Single Phase PWM Inverter

8. Voltage Commutated Chopper

9. Current Commutated Chopper 10. Complementary Commutated Chopper

Page 64: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 78 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1304 FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the basic concepts of a communication system and acquire knowledge about amplitude modulation and demodulation methods. To study about the principles of Frequency Modulation and Phase modulation schemes along with its types. To provide an understanding about sampling, pulse modulation concepts, digital modulation techniques and multiplexing methods. To know about the working principles of Transmitters and Receivers. To enrich knowledge the about optical communication system, satellite communication and power line carrier communication.

UNIT 1 BASICS AND AMPLITUDE MODULATION 9 Hrs. Electromagnetic Spectrum and communication applications-Elements of communication systems-baseband

and pass band signals-need for modulation-amplitude modulation-modulation index of AM-frequency spectrum-AM power distribution in AM_DSB_ FC- generation of AM_DSB_SC using FET balanced modulator-Generation of AM_SSB using phase shift and filter method-AM VSB-Comparison of AM schemes. - AM demodulation-Envelope detector-significance of RC time constant in envelope detector.

UNIT 2 ANGLE MODULATION 9 Hrs. Principle of angle modulation-Frequency modulation-modulation index of FM-frequency deviation-deviation

ratio-Carson’s rule for bandwidth of FM-Comparison of AM and FM-narrow band and wideband FM-comparison-Generation of FM using varactor diode modulator (direct method)-Indirect method of FM generation. Phase modulation-Generation of PM using frequency modulator.FM demodulation-Principle of slope detection-balance slope detector-Foster Seely discriminator-ratio detector-amplitude limiting using ratio detector.

UNIT 3 PULSE MODULATION AND MULTIPLEXING 9 Hrs. Pulse modulation-Sampling process-sampling theorem- concepts of PAM-PWM-PPM-Generation and

demodulation of PAM, PWM, PPM-comparison-PCM system-quantization-DPCM-Adaptive Delta Modulation-Digital modulation techniques-ASK-FSK-PSK-QPSK.Concept of multiplexing-frequency division multiplexing-time division multiplexing-code division multiplexing-space division multiplexing.

UNIT 4 TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9 Hrs. AM transmitter -low level modulator- high level collector and base modulator- FM transmitter-preemphasis

concept- FM stereo broad cast transmitter. AM Receivers-super heterodyne receiver- AGC- choice of IF- tracking - alignment - receiver characteristics-FM receiver- Deemphasis concept-FM stereo broad cast receiver- AFC.

UNIT 5 BROAD BAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Facsimile system - optical communication system-fiber optic cable modes -mobile telephone

communication-cellular concept- satellite communication system-satellite frequency plans and allocations-frequency reuse-satellite system link models- computer communication - electronic mail- power line carrier communication-SCADA.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. George Kennedy, “Electronic Communication Systems”, Third Edition, TMH, New Delhi,1991

2. Anokh Singh, “Principles of Communication Engineering”, S. Chand & Company Ltd, 2006 3. Taub and Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, Third Edition, TMH, New Delhi, 2008. 4. Louis Frenzel, "Communication Electronics”, McGraw-Hill Companies,1999. 5. Bruce Carlson, “Communication Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2010

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying12 marks 80 Marks

(Distribution may be 80% Theory & 20% Numerical)

Page 65: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 79 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1307 EMBEDDED PROCESSORS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES This course shall impart All aspects of the design and architectural development of embedded processors for real time applications. The design, instruction set and applications of PIC microcontroller. The basics of ARM processor and DSP processors

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PIC MICROCONTROLLERS 9 Hrs. Introduction to PIC - Evaluation of hardware architectures - Princeton architecture - Von Neumann architecture-

Harvard architecture - SHARC - RISC Vs CISC - Features of PIC - instruction parallelism- Architecture of PIC 16F887- Pin Configuration - Addressing modes - Instruction set - Simple arithmetic and logical Programs.

UNIT 2 PIC ONCHIP PERIPHERALS 9 Hrs. Memory - Core SFR - Interrupts - I/O Ports-Timers - CCP modules - Capture Mode - Compare Mode-PWM Mode - Serial communication module - USART - SPI interface - I2C interface Analog Comparator, ADC.

UNIT 3 APPLICATIONS USING PIC 9 Hrs.

Assembly & C programming - Compilers - Assemblers - Directives - Switches & Push buttons - Relay- LEDs - Interfacing seven segment displays - LCD interfacing - Keypad Interfacing, Timer Applications- Case study Temperature monitoring System - Case study Digital Clock.

UNIT 4 ARM PROCESSOR 9 Hrs.

ARM family design - Registers - Pipeline organization 3 stage & 5 stage - Exceptions - Interrupts - Core extensions - ARM processor families - ARM7 TDMI architecture - Memory hierarchy - Advantages of Thump instructions.

UNIT 5 DSP PROCESSORS 9 Hrs. Introduction - Applications Overview -fixed and floating point - Functional Diagram of TMS320C54XX- Bus

structure - Barrel Shifter - MAC unit - Memory - On-chip peripherals - Functional diagram of ADSP 218X - DAG Unit-Memory architecture.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Danny Causey, Rolin McKinlay, Muhammad Ali Mazidi , “PIC Microcontroller and Embedded Systems : Using assembly and C for PIC 18 1st Edition “- Pearson Education.

2. Andrew Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer's Guide: Designing and Optimizing System Software” - Elsevier.

3. B Venkataramani M Bhaskar, “Digital Signal processors Architecture, Programming and Applications” - Tata McGrawHill Second Edition.

4. John Peatman, “Design with PIC microcontrollers” - Pearson Education.

5. www.microe.com.

6. www.analog.com.

7. www.ti.com.

8. www.dspguide.com.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 66: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 80 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1311 SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES This course is to provide

An in-depth understanding of different concepts used in a satellite communication system. Detail description about orbital dynamics, Earth segment, space segments and space links Knowledge about link budget calculation and satellite accessing techniques

An overview of satellite applications and networking of satellites

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

Introduction, Types -Active and Passive Satellite, Frequency allocation, types of Satellite orbits, Kepler’s laws, Definitions of terms for earth-orbiting satellites, orbital parameters Two line elements, Apogee and Perigee heights, Orbit perturbations, Geo stationary orbit, Antenna look angles, Limits of visibility, Sub satellite point and prediction of satellite position, Earth Eclipse of satellite, Sun transit outage, launching orbits - Launch vehicle - expendable and reusable types.

UNIT 2 THE SPACE SEGMENT AND ANTENNAS 9 Hrs.

Introduction, The Power supply, Attitude control, Spinning satellite stabilization, Momentum wheel stabilization, Station Keeping, Thermal control, TT&C subsystem, Transponders, The wide band receiver, The input demultiplexer, the power amplifier, the antenna subsystem. The isotropic radiator and antenna gain, horn antenna, parabolic reflector, double reflector- Cassie grain antenna- Gregorian antenna.

UNIT 3 THE EARTH SEGMENT AND THE SPACE LINK 9 Hrs.

Transmit receive earth station subsystems-up converters-High power Amplifier- Receive chain-LNA & LNB. TVRO Earth station EIRP, Transmission losses, the link budget equation, System noise, Effect of rain,combined uplink and downlink C/N ratio.

UNIT 4 SATELLITE ACCESS AND SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Multiple access techniques- Concepts and types of TDMA, FDMA and CDMA.DBS, VSAT, Remote sensing, Satellite Mobile services, GPS, INMARSAT, INSAT, Video tele conferencing.

UNIT 5 SATELLITE IN NETWORKING 9 Hrs.

Satellite digital transmission and on-board switching, PDH & its limitation, SDH: development, standards, SONET, SDH over satellite, ISDN over satellite. Different viewpoints of satellite networking, IP packet encapsulation, Satellite IP networking, IP multicast over satellite, IP multicast routing, IP multicast security, DVB over satellite (DVB-S).

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite communication”, 4th edition - Tata Mc Graw Hill Co.Special Indian print, 2009.

2. Zhili Sun-John, “Satellite Networking Principles and Protocol”, W.& Sons 2005.

3. Timothy pratt & C W. Bostain, “Satellite communication”, Wiley 3rd edition 2006.

4. K.N.Raja Rao, “Fundamentals of Satellite communication”. PHI 2004.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 67: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 81 REGULATIONS 2015

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

SEC1322 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce security concepts

To provide fundamental understanding about cryptography

To comprehend and apply relevant cryptographic techniques for network security

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs. Terminologies of Cryptography: Principles of Security - Confidentiality, Authentication, Integrity,

Non-repudiation, Access Control, Availability: Types of Attacks - Active and Passive: Classical Encryption Techniques: Substitution Cipher - Caesar Cipher, Play Fair Cipher, Hill cipher, One Time Pad: Transposition Cipher - Rail Fence and Simple Columnar Techniques.

UNIT 2 SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9 Hrs. Symmetric Key Cryptosystems: Comparison of Stream Ciphers and Block Ciphers: Feistel Block Cipher: Block Cipher Modes of Operation: Data Encryption Standard - Details of one round in DES:Advanced Encryption Standard.

UNIT 3 PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9 Hrs.

Modular Arithmetic: Euclidean Algorithm: Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorem; Chinese Remainder Theorem: Principles of Public Key Cryptosystems; Key Management - Distribution of Public Keys, Use of Public Key Encryption to Distribute Secret Keys: RSA Algorithm: Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange; Concepts of Elliptic Curve Cryptography.

UNIT 4 SECURITY FUNCTIONS & APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Authentication Requirements: Message Authentication Codes - Requirements for MAC, Basic Uses of MAC: Hash Functions - Requirements for a Hash function, Simple Hash function, Basic Uses of Hash Function, MD-5: Kerberos: X.509 Authentication Service – Certificate: E-Mail Security - Pretty good Privacy, S/MIME.

UNIT 5 NETWORK & SYSTEM SECURITY 9 Hrs.

IP Security - IP Security Architecture, Authentication Header, Encapsulating Security Payload, Benefits, Applications; Web Security - Secure Socket Layer, Secure Electronic Transaction - Payment Processing; Firewalls - Design Principles, Characteristics, Types of Firewalls: Antivirus approaches.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 2n d Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.

2. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security - Principles and Practices”, 4th Edition, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.

3. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Cryptography & Network Security”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2007.

4. Niels Ferguson and Bruce Schneier, “Practical Cryptography”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.

5. Niels Ferguson, Bruce Schneier, Tadayoshi Kohno, “Cryptography Engineering- Design Principles and Practical Applications”, Wiley Publishing, Inc, Indiana, 2010.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (60%Theory and 40% Numerical)

Page 68: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 82 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1402 PROGRAMMING IN HDL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To focus on the basic concept of VHDL, styles and features of verilog HDL.

UNIT 1 BASIC CONCEPTS IN VHDL 9 Hrs.

Digital system design process - Hardware simulation - Introduction to VHDL - Language elements of VHDL - Data objects - Data types - Operators - Signal assignments - Inertial delay mechanism - Transport delay mechanism - Variable assignments - Concurrent and Sequential assignments- Delta delay.

UNIT 2 MODELING IN VHDL 9 Hrs.

Data flow modeling - Concurrent Signal Assignment statements - Structural modeling - Component declaration - Component Instantiation - Behavioral modeling - Process statement - wait statement - Conditional and loop statements - Generics and configurations - Examples for modelings.

UNIT 3 INTRODUCTION TO VERILOG HDL 9 Hrs. Basic concepts - Levels for design description - Module - Delays - Language elements - Compiler directives - value set - data types - Parameters - Expressions - Operands - operators in verilog HDL.

UNIT 4 STYLES OF MODELING 9 Hrs. Gate level modeling -Primitive Gates- Multiple input and multiple output gates - User Defined Primitives -

Combination UDP - Sequential UDP- Data flow modeling - Behavioral modeling - procedural constructs - procedural assignments - conditional and loop statements - Structural Modeling - Examples for modeling.

UNIT 5 FEATURES IN VERILOG HDL 9 Hrs. Tasks- Functions -systems tasks and functions - Verification - Modeling a test bench - timing and delays -

Switch level modeling - state machine modeling - Moore FSM - Melay FSM - Design of memories - Design of microcontroller CPUs.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

5. J.Bhaskar, “A VHDL Primer”, , Prentice Hall of India Limited. 3rd edition 2004

6. Douglas L. Perry, "VHDL", McGraw Hill, 2002.

7. J.Bhaskar, “A Verilog HDL Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Limited. 3rd edition 2004

8. Stphen Brown, "Fundamental of Digital logic with VHDL Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 69: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 83 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1404 WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the overview of cellular system concept. To understand the concept of GSM and GPRS. To study the various characteristics of WAP and cable replacement devices. To understand the concept and characteristics of 3G and B3G systems.

UNIT 1 OVERVIEW OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. History of wireless communication - Spectrum allocation for wireless communication - Standard bodies for

wireless communication - Evolution of wireless communication starting from 1G to 5G - Cellular system concepts - Circuit switched and Packet switched cellular systems - architecture and operation of cellular systems - Frequency reuse - Channel Assignment(Fixed ,Dynamic, Hybrid).Flat fading and frequency selective fading - Diversity techniques (time, frequency, space) - PCS network architecture - Handoff - inter BS handoff-Inter system handoff - Hard handoff and soft handoff.

UNIT 2 2G and B2G SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) - Functional architecture of GSM - Common control channels

- Dedicated control channels -Location tracking and call setup - GSM location update - Short Message Service (SMS) - Network architecture of SMS - Protocol hierarchy of SMS.

Evolving from GSM to General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) - Functional groups of GPRS - Architecture of GPRS - Interfaces of GPRS.

UNIT 3 WAP and CABLE REPLACEMENT DEVICES 9 Hrs. Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) - WAP model - WAP Gateway - WAP Protocols-Wireless Datagram

protocol (WDP) - Wireless Transport layer security (WTLS)-Wireless Transaction protocol (WTP) - Wireless Session protocol (WSP) - Wireless Application Environment (WAE) - Wireless bearers for WAP.

Functional Architecture, Protocol and technical details of - Bluetooth - Zigbee - Ultra Wide Band (UWB)-IrDA (Infra red Data Association) - Radio Frequency Identification (RFID).

UNIT 4 3G SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. 3G Networks - Features and Performance of 3G networks -Frequency allocation for IMT (International

Telecommunications Union) 2000 - IMT 2000 family - Architecture of Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) network - MAC layer-RLC layer-RRC layer - 3GPP release 99 network architecture. Network architecture of Enhanced Data rates for Global Evaluation (EDGE).CDMA 2000 - Physical channels - Radio Interface parameters of CDMA 2000 FDD- Transmission characteristics of CDMA 2000 TDD.

UNIT 5 B3G SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Features, operation and applications of Wi-Fi, WiMax, OFDM, OFDMA, OFDM-IDMA, MIMO, Cognitive Radio, LTE.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Andreas F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications”, 2n d Edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2011. 2. William C.Y. Lee., "Wireless & Cellular Telecommunications", 3rd edition, McGraw Hill.2006. 3. Yibing Lin, "Wireless & mobile Network architecture", Wiley 2002.

4. Tao Jiang, Lingyang Song and Van Zhang, “Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access Fundamentals and Applications” Taylor and Francis Group, 2010.

5. Yong Soo Cho, Jaekwon Kim, Won Young Yang and Chung G. Kang, “MIMO-OFDM Wireless Communications with MATLAB”, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd, 2010.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 70: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 84 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1601 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To familiarize the fundamental concepts of microprocessor architecture. x

Learn the design aspects of I/O and Memory Interfacing circuits.

x Study about communication and bus interfacing of advanced microprocessors. x

To introduce the concepts of advanced microprocessors.

x To introduce the basic architecture of Pentium family of processors.

UNIT 1 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE 9 Hrs.

Internal Microprocessor Architecture - Real mode memory addressing - Protected mode memory addressing - Memory paging - Data addressing modes - Program memory addressing modes - Stack memory addressing modes - Data movement instructions - Program control instructions - Arithmetic and Logic Instructions. Intel 80186 - Architecture.

UNIT 2 INTRODUCTION TO INTEL 80286, 80386 & 80486 9 Hrs.

Introduction to 80286 - Architecture, Real address mode & protected virtual address mode. 80386 Microprocessor - Architecture, Pins & Signals, Memory System Registers, 80386 operating modes - Paging Technique, Protected Mode Operation & Intel 80486 Architecture. Comparison of Microprocessors (8086 - 80286 - 80386 - 80486)

UNIT 3 PENTIUM PROCESSORS 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Pentium Microprocessor - Special Pentium registers - Branch Prediction Logic, Floating Point Module, Cache Structure, and Superscalar Architecture. Pentium memory management - New Pentium Instructions - Pentium Processor -Special Pentium pro features - Pentium 4 processor

UNIT 4 RISC PROCESSORS I 9 Hrs.

PowerPC-620 - Instruction fetching - Branch Prediction - Fetching - Speculation, Instruction dispatching - dispatch stalls - Instruction Execution - Issue stalls- Execution Parallelism - Instruction completion - Basics of P6 micro architecture - Pipelining - Memory subsystem

UNIT 5 RISC PROCESSORS II (SUPERSCALAR PROCESSORS) Conversion of Colour Models; Basic of Full-Colour Image Processing; Colour Transformations; Smoothing;

Sharpening; Segmentation; Applications of Image Processing - Motion Analysis, Image Fusion, Image Classification

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2004

2. Barry B.Brey , “The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 8086, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium Pro Processor,

Pentium II, Pentium III, Pentium 4, Architecture, Programming and interfacing”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New

Delhi, 2003

3. Alan Clements, “The Principles of computer Hardware”, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 2003

4. John Paul Shen, Mikko H.Lipasti, “Modern Processor Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 10 marks 80 Marks

Page 71: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 85 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1602 ASIC DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To familiarize with FPGA, ASIC floor planning and optimization algorithms.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO ASIC 9 Hrs.

Types of ASICs - Design flow - CMOS transistors CMOS Design rules - Combinational Logic Cell - Sequential logic cell - Data path logic cell - Transistors as Resistors - Transistor Parasitic Capacitance- Logical effort - Library cell design - Library architecture

UNIT 2 FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS 9 Hrs.

Organization of FPGAs - FPGA Programming Technologies-Programmable Logic Block Architectures-Programmable Interconnects - Programmable I/O blocks in FPGAs - Dedicated Specialized Components of FPGAs-Applications of FPGAs.

UNIT 3 PROGRAMMABLE ASIC 9 Hrs. Introduction-Programming Technology - Device Architecture -The Xilinx XC2000- XC3000 and XC4000 Architectures. The Actel ACT1-ACT2 and ACT3 Architectures.

Anti fuse - static RAM - EPROM and EEPROM technology - Altera FLEX - Altera MAX DC &AC inputs and outputs - Clock & Power inputs - Xilinx I/O blocks.

UNIT 4 ASIC FLOOR PLANNING, PLACEMENT AND ROUTING 9 Hrs. ASIC Construction: Physical Design - System Partitioning - FPGA Partitioning - Partitioning Methods.

Floor-planning and Placement: Floor planning – Placement - Physical Design Flow. Routing: Global Routing - Detailed Routing- Special Routing - Design checks.

UNIT 5 OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHMS 9 Hrs.

Planar subset problem(PSP) - Single layer global routing single layer detailed routing wire length and bend minimization technique - Over the cell (OTC) Routing - Multichip modules (MCM ) - Programmable logic arrays-Transistor chaining - Weinberger Arrays - Gate Matrix Layout - 1D compaction-2D compaction.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Stephen M. Trimberger, “Field Programmable Gate Array Technology “, Springer International Edition, 1994

2. Charles H. Roth Jr, Lizy Kurian John , “Digital Systems Design “, Cengage Learning,

3. M. J. S. Smith, "Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addison -Wesley Longman Inc., 1997.

4. Farzad Nekoogar and Faranak Nekoogar, “From ASICs to SOCs: A Practical Approach”,Prentice Hall PTR, 2003

5. John V. Oldfield, Richard C. Dorf , “Field Programmable Gate Arrays”, Wiley India

6. Pak K. Chan, Samiha Mourad , “Digital Design Using Field Programmable Gate Arrays”, Pearson Low Price Edition.

7. Ian Grout, “Digital Systems Design with FPGAs and CPLDs”, Elsevier, Newnes.

8. Wayne Wolf , “FPGA based System Design”, Prentice Hall Modern Semiconductor Design.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 72: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 86 REGULATIONS 2015

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

SEC1603 AUTOMATIC SPEECH RECOGNITION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquaint the students with the fundamentals of speech signals, Time domain and Frequency domain techniques for speech signals and different analysis methods of speech signals and recognition techniques On completion of this course the student will recognize

Acquire knowledge about the fundamentals and digital processing of speech signals. Acquire knowledge about the Time domain and Frequency domain techniques for preprocessing of speech signals.

Acquire knowledge about the different analysis techniques of speech signals

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEECH SIGNAL 9 Hrs.

History of speech recognition research, The Speech Signal: Speech production mechanism, Classification of speech, sounds, nature of speech signal, models of speech production. Speech signal processing: purpose of speech processing, digital models for speech signal, Digital processing of speech signals, Significance, short time analysis

UNIT 2 TIME DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9 Hrs. Time domain parameters of speech, methods for extracting the parameters, Zero crossings, Auto correlation function, pitch estimation

UNIT 3 FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9 Hrs. Short time Fourier analysis, filter bank analysis, spectrographic analysis, Formant extraction, pitch extraction, Analysis - synthesis systems. Homomorphic Signal Processing

UNIT 4 SPEECH ANALYSIS AND SPEECH RECOGNITION 9 Hrs.

Cepstral analysis of speech, formant and pitch estimation, Mel frequency cepstrum computation, Applications of speech processing - Speech recognition, Speech synthesis and speaker verification, Basic pattern recognition approaches, Parametric representation of speech, Evaluating the similarity of speech patterns, Isolated digit Recognition System, Continuous digit Recognition System. Vector quantization, speech coding

UNIT 5 HIDDEN MARKOV MODEL FOR SPEECH RECOGNITION 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Hidden Markov Model (HMM), Types of HMM, Hidden Markov Model (HMM) for speech recognition, Viterbi algorithm, Training and testing using HMMs, Adapting to variability in speech (DTW), Language models. Example of speech recognition project.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. L. Rabiner and B.-H. Juang, “Fundamentals of Speech Recognition”, Prentice Hall, 1995,ISBN 0-1 3-01 51 57-2

2. L. R. Rabiner and R. W. Schafer, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Prentice-Hall, 1978, ISBN 0-13-213603-1.

3. J.L Flanagan, “Speech Analysis Synthesis and Perception” - 2nd Edition - Springer Vertag, 1972.

4. I.H.Witten, “Principles of Computer Speech” , Academic press, 1983.

5. Douglas O'Shaughnessy , “Speech Communications: Human & Machine” -, 2nd ed., IEEE Press.

6. Thomas F. Quateri, “Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing: Principles and Practice” - 1st Ed., PE.

7. Claudio Becchetti and Lucio Prina Ricotti, “Speech Recognition”, Wiley

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 73: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 87 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1605 DIGITAL IMAGE AND MULTIMEDIA PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To know the fundamental concepts of Image and Multimedia Processing x To become conversant with various Image Enhancement techniques x To study and understand various Morphological and segmentation concepts and techniques x To study various Hardware platforms and Software tools, various Audio and Video compression concepts and coding x Upon completion of this course, a successful student should be able to design and implement programs that deal with image, video, and audio data.

UNIT 1 DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs. Elements of Visual Perception; Image Sensing and Acquisition; Image Sampling and Quantization; Basic Relationships

between Pixels; Monochromatic Vision Models; Colour Vision Models; Colour Fundamentals; Colour Models.

UNIT 2 IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9 Hrs. Introduction; Point Processing - Image Negatives, Log transformations, Power Law Transformations,

Piecewise-Linear Transformation Functions; Arithmetic/Logic Operations - Image Subtraction, Image Averaging; Histogram Processing - Histogram Equalization, Histogram Matching; Spatial filtering - Smoothing, Sharpening; Smoothing Frequency Domain Filters - Ideal Low Pass, Butterworth Low Pass, Gaussian Low Pass; Sharpening Frequency Domain Filters - Ideal High Pass, Butterworth High Pass, Gaussian High Pass. UNIT 3 MORPHOLOGICAL PROCESSING & SEGMENTATION 9 Hrs.

Morphological Image Processing - Logic Operations involving Binary Images; Dilation and Erosion; Opening and Closing; Basic Morphological Algorithms - Boundary Extraction, Region Filling, Thickening, Thinning; Image Segmentation - Detection of Discontinuities; Edge Linking; Boundary Detection; Thresholding - Global and Adaptive; Region based Segmentation. UNIT 4 MULTIMEDIA 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Multimedia - Media and Data streams - Properties of a Multimedia system - Data streams characteristics - Information units - Multimedia Hardware platforms - Memory and storage devices- Input and output devices - Multimedia software tools. Multimedia Building blocks - Audio: Basic sound concepts - Music-speech-audio file formats - Images and graphics: Basic concepts- Computer image processing. UNIT 5 AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPRESSION 9 Hrs.

Human Auditory system - WAVE audio format-Speech compression - MPEG4 Audio lossless coding(ALS) - VIDEO compression Introduction - Motion compensation - video signal representation ,ITU -T Recommendation H.261, Model Based Coding - MPEG1- MPEG2 H.262 ,ITU-T Recommendations H.263, Advanced Video Coding, ATM Networks - Compressions issues in ATM networks, Compression Algorithms for packet videos.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, ’”Digital Image Processing”, Pearson , Second Edition, 2004.

David Saloman,”Data compression”, Springer International, 4th Edition. Khalid Sayood, ”Introduction To

Data Compressio” ,Elsevier 3rd Edition.

Ralfsteinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Computing, Communications & Applications” - Pearson

Edn Rajan Parekh, “Principles of Multimedia, Tata Mc Graw Hill. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital

Image Processin”, Pearson 2002. J F Koegel Buford- -Multimedia systems Addison Wesley

T Vaughan-,”Multimedia: Making it work” Tata Mc Graw Hill

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 74: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 88 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1606 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE, EIE, E&C, ETCE and CSE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To understand the basic principles and methods of digital image processing x

To have a comprehensive background in image filtering

x To develop analytic skill to process images

UNIT 1 DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs. Elements of Visual Perception; Image Sensing and Acquisition; Image Sampling and Quantization; Basic

Relationships between Pixels; Monochromatic Vision Models; Colour Vision Models; Colour Fundamentals; Colour Models

UNIT 2 IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9 Hrs.

Introduction; Point Processing - Image Negatives, Log transformations, Power Law Transformations, Piecewise-Linear Transformation Functions; Arithmetic/Logic Operations - Image Subtraction, Image Averaging; Histogram Processing - Histogram Equalization, Histogram Matching; Spatial filtering - Smoothing, Sharpening; Smoothing Frequency Domain Filters - Ideal Low Pass, Butterworth Low Pass, Gaussian Low Pass; Sharpening Frequency Domain Filters - Ideal High Pass, Butterworth High Pass, Gaussian High Pass.

UNIT 3 IMAGE RESTORATION 9 Hrs.

A Model of Image Degradation/Restoration Process; Noise Models; Inverse Filtering, Minimum Mean Square Error Filtering, Constrained Least Square Filtering; Geometric Mean Filter; Geometric Transformations - Spatial Transformations, Gray-Level Interpolation.

UNIT 4 MORPHOLOGICAL PROCESSING & SEGMENTATION 9 Hrs.

Morphological Image Processing - Logic Operations involving Binary Images; Dilation and Erosion; Opening and Closing; Basic Morphological Algorithms - Boundary Extraction, Region Filling, Thickening, Thinning; Image Segmentation - Detection of Discontinuities; Edge Linking; Boundary Detection; Thresholding - Global and Adaptive; Region based Segmentation.

UNIT 5 COLOUR IMAGE PROCESSING & APPLICATIONS Conversion of Colour Models; Basic of Full-Colour Image Processing; Colour Transformations; Smoothing;

Sharpening; Segmentation; Applications of Image Processing - Motion Analysis, Image Fusion, Image Classification.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 2n d Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2004.

2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2002.

3. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2001.

4. Rafeal C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods and Steven L. Eddins, “Digital Image Processing using Matlab”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2004.

5. Bernd Jähne, “Digital Image Processing”, 5th Revised and Extended Edition, Springer, 2002.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 75: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 89 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1611 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To impart an knowledge about ISDN Architecture, Organization, ATM ,ISDN applications and

implementations.

UNIT 1 ISDN BASICS 9 Hrs.

Evolution of ISDN - Definition of ISDN- ISDN System Architecture- ISDN integrated access- ISDN Digital Services-Digital Telephones - Types of switched networks - Space and time switching - Circuit switching - Packet switching -Comparison with circuit switching - OSI reference model- ISDN channels-Access interfaces-Functional Devices and reference points.

UNIT 2 ISDN SERVICES 9 Hrs. Standard Organization- Services Requirement- ISDN Services- bear services-Teleservices- Broadband Services-Service attributes- basic and supplementary services - Packeted frame - mode bearer Services.

UNIT 3 ISDN PROTOCOL AND SIGNALING SCHEMES 9 Hrs.

Protocol Architecture - Physical layer protocol - D-Channel - LAPD protocol - Network layer - Data link and layer 3 protocols - Numbers and Address. Signaling System No.7 - SS7 protocol and Services. - Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) - ISDN User Part (ISUP) - Transaction Capabilities Application Part (TCAP) - Application Service Elements (ASE) - Operation Maintenance and Administration Part (OMAP).

UNIT 4 ATM 9 Hrs.

Broadband Services and Call Relay switching - ATM Overview - ATM protocol architecture - Virtual Channels and Virtual Path Switching - BISDN Architecture - BISDN Protocol- layer - ATM Adopter layer - ATM QOS parameters - Classical IP over ATM - ATM in LAN environment (LANE).

UNIT 5 ISDN APPLICATION AND IMPLEMENTATIONS 9 Hrs. ISDN Centrax configuration - ITU-T recommendations about ISDN -ISDN and LANs - Metropolitan Area

Network.- TCP/IP and Interworks - Application- Video conferencing - Telemedicne - User configuration - Intention ISDN Activities - ISDN status in Spain and Europe.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Gray.C.Kessler, “ISDN”, Mc Graw Hill, International 4th Edition, 2007 Reprint.

2. William Stallings, “ISDN and Broadband ISDN with frame relay and ATM”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall Inc, U.K,2005 reprint.

3. John Ranayne, “ISDN”, Wheels Publication, India, 2007 reprint.

4. Andrew S.Tanenbaum, “Computer network”, 2nd Edition, 2004 reprint.

5. P. Bocker : “ISDN, The Integrated Services Digital Network: concept, methods, systems”; Ed. Springer-Verlag, 1992

6. Sumit Kasera and Pankaj Sethi ,"ATM Networks Concepts and protocols", Tata McGraw Hill Publication, 2007.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 76: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 90 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1612 MEMS AND ITS APPLICATIONS ___ L ______________________ T

P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and EIE) ____________________ 3 __ 0 __ 0 ____ 3 _______ 100 __

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To learn and design concepts of Micro electronics

x To learn and design the micro sensors and its operations

UNIT 1 OVERVIEW OF MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS 8 Hrs.

Definition - historical development - Fundamentals - Properties, Introduction to Design of MEMS and NEMS, MEMS and Microsystems, Microsystems and microelectronics, Microsystems and miniaturization, Working principle of micro system - Micro sensors, Micro actuators, Micro accelerometers and Micro fluidics, MEMS materials: Silicon, silicon compounds, silicon Piezo- resistors, Gallium Arsenide, Quartz, Piezoelectric crystals, Polymers, Metals.

UNIT 2 MEMS FABRICATION & PACKAGING 10 Hrs. Micro-system fabrication processes: Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, and Oxidation. Thin film

depositions: LPCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Electroplating; Etching techniques: Dry and wet etching, electrochemical etching; Micromachining: Bulk Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, High Aspect-Ratio (LIGA and LIGA-like) Technology; Micro-Stereo lithography for polymer MEMS.

UNIT 3 MICRO SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9 Hrs.

Micro-sensing for MEMS: Piezo-resistive Pressure Sensor, Capacitive sensor, Piezoelectric sensing, Resonant sensing, Surface Acoustic Wave sensors Vibratory gyroscope, Electromechanical transducers: Piezoelectric transducers, Electrostrictive transducers, Magnetostrictive transducers, Electrostatic actuators, Electromagnetic transducers, Electro-dynamic transducers, Electro-thermal actuators, comparison of electro-thermal actuation process.

UNIT 4 MEMS DESIGN AND INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL RF MEMS 9 Hrs.

Micro system Design - Design consideration, process design, Mechanical design, Mechanical design using MEMS. Optical MEMS,- System design basics - Gaussian optics, Matrix operations, Resolution. MEMS scanners and retinal scanning display, Digital Micro mirror devices. RF Memes - Design basics, case study - Capacitive RF MEMS switch, Performance issues.

UNIT 5 MEMS PACKAGING AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. MEMS packaging: Role of MEMS packaging, Types of MEMS packaging, selection of packaging materials,

flip-chip and multichip Unit packaging, RF MEMS packaging issues. Micro-machined transmission line and components, micro-machined RF Filters, Micro-machined Phase shifters, and Micro-machined antenna, Gyros and Bio-MEMS.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Vijay K. Varadan, K. J. Vinoy and K. A. Jose , “RF MEMS & Their Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.

2. Tai - Rai Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacturing”, Tata MC Graw Hill, New Delhi, Edition 2002.

3. Gabriel M Rebeiz, “RF MEMS - Theory Design and Technology”, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.

4. Nadim Maluf, “An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design”, Artech House ,2000

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 77: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 91 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1613 MOBILE ADHOC NETWORKS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To acquire knowledge about Adhoc networks and mobility models. x To understand the design issues and classifications of MAC protocols. x To study about the classifications of routing protocols. x To acquire knowledge about the QOS issues, Energy Management issues and challenges in AdHoc Networks. x To study about Adhoc networks application and to explore the concepts of wireless mesh and vehicular networks.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Origin Of Adhoc:Packet Radio Networks - Technical Challenges - Architecture of PRNETs - Components of

Packet Radios - Introduction to Adhoc networks - Definition, characteristics features - Issues in Mobile Ad Hoc networks- Types of Ad hoc Mobile Communications - Types of Mobile Host Movements - Ad hoc wireless Internet.

Characteristics of Wireless channel Mobility models - Indoor and Outdoor.

UNIT 2 MEDIUM ACCESS PROTOCOLS 9 Hrs. MAC protocols: design issues, goals and classification. Contention based protocols - With reservation,

scheduling algorithms, protocols using direction antennas - Distributed packet reservation - Multiple access protocol, collision avoidance time allocation protocol. IEEE standards: 802.1 1a, 802.1 1b, 802.11g.

UNIT 3 ROUTING PROTOCOLS AND MULTICAST ROUTING IN ADHOC NETWORKS 9 Hrs. Introduction - Issues in Designing a Routing Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks - Classifications of Routing

Protocols Table Driven routing protocols: Destination Sequenced Distance Vector Routing Protocol - Cluster head Gateway switched routing protocol. On Demand routing protocol: Dynamic source routing protocol, AODV routing protocol, temporarily ordered routing algorithm. Hybrid routing protocols: Zone routing protocol, Zone based Hierarchical link state routing protocol.

Architecture Model for Multicast Routing Protocols - Classifications of Multicast Routing Protocols - Tree Based Multicast Routing Protocols - Mesh-Based Multicast Routing Protocols - Energy-Efficient Multicasting - Comparisons of Multicast Routing Protocols

UNIT 4 QOS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs. Issues and Challenges in Providing QoS in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks - Classifications of QoS Solutions - MAC

Layer Solutions - Network Layer Solutions. Need for Energy Management in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks - Classification of Energy Management Schemes - Battery Management Schemes - Transmission Power Management Schemes - System Power Management Schemes.

UNIT 5 ADHOC NOMADIC MOBILE APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. In the Office, While Traveling, Arriving Home, In the Car, Shopping Malls, The Modern battlefield, Car-to-Car

Mobile Communications, Mobile Collaborative Applications - Location/context based mobile services - Introduction to wireless mesh networks and vehicular adhoc networks.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. C.Sivaram Murthy and B.S Manoj, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks”, Pearson Education, Second Edition India, 2001. 2. K Toh, “Adhoc mobile wireless networks, Protocols and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2009.

3. Stefano Basagni, “ Mobile Ad hoc Networking”, Wiley Inter science, IEEE Press, 2004. 4. George Aggelou “Mobile Ad Hoc Networks”, McGrawHill, 2004. 5. Thomas Krag and Sebastin Buettrich, “Wireless Mesh Networking”, 2nd Edition, O’Reilly Publishers, 2007.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

(Distribution may be 20% Theory & 80% Numerical)

Page 78: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 92 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1614 MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE and ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart the fundamentals concepts of mobile communication systems. To introduce various technologies and protocols involved in mobile communication. Examine Theory Research in Mobility

Examine Systems Research in Mobility

UNIT 1 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Basic cellular systems - Frequency Management and Channel Assignment - Types of handoff and their characteristics, dropped call rates & their evaluation - MAC - SDMA - FDMA - TDMA - CDMA - Cellular Wireless Networks.

UNIT 2 WIRELESS NETWORKS 9 Hrs.

Wireless LAN - IEEE 802.11 Standards - Architecture - OFDM Technology - Services - Mobile Ad hoc Networks- IEEE 802.16 standards, Comparison of 802.11 and 802.16 - Wireless Local Loop - Architecture - WLL Technologies.

UNIT 3 MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs.

GSM – Architecture - Location tracking and call setup - GSM Mobility management – Handover – Security - GSM SMS - International roaming for GSM - Call recording functions - subscriber and service data management - Mobile Number portability.

GPRS – Architecture - GPRS procedures - Attach and detach procedures - PDP context procedure - Combined RA/LA update procedures - Billing.

UNIT 4 MOBILE NETWORK AND TRANSPORT LAYERS 9 Hrs.

Mobile IP - Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol - Mobile Ad Hoc Routing Protocols - Multicast routing - TCP over Wireless Networks - Indirect TCP - Snooping TCP - Mobile TCP - Fast Retransmit / Fast Recovery – Transmission / Timeout Freezing-Selective Retransmission - Transaction Oriented TCP - TCP over 2.5 / 3G wireless Networks

UNIT 5 APPLICATION LAYER 9 Hrs. WAP Model - Mobile Location based services - WAP Gateway - WAP protocols - WAP user agent profile-caching model - Wireless bearers for WAP - WML - WMLScripts - WTA – iMode - SyncML.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.

2. William Stallings, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, Pearson Education, 2002.

3. Yi-Bing Lin, Imrich Chlamtac, “Wireless and Mobile Network Architectures”, John Wiley and sons, 2001

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 79: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 93 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1615 NANOELECTRONICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To understand the evolution and basics of Nanoelectronics

x To understand the different physical deposition techniques for thin film deposition x

To learn the different types of chemical vapour decomposition techniques x To learn about the various characterization techniques

x To understand the basics of elementary quantum devices

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOELECTRONICS 9 Hrs.

Moore’s Law, Wave functions, wave packets, Schrodinger’s wave equation, potential barriers and tunneling, Fermi-Dirac statistics, Density of states, Limitations of conventional FET in nanoscales, Quantum Well, Quantum wire, Quantum dot, current flow in two terminal Quantum dots, ballistic transport, Single Electron Transistor

UNIT 2 PHYSICAL DEPOSITION (THIN FILM) TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs.

Basics of physical methods, Glow discharge DC Sputtering, Triode sputtering, Getter sputtering, Radio frequency sputtering, Magnetron sputtering, Ion beam sputtering, AC sputtering, Vacuum evaporation, Resistive heat Evaporation, Flash Evaporation, Electron Beam Evaporation, LASER evaporation

UNIT 3 CHEMICAL DEPOSITION (THIN FILM) TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. Fundamentals of chemical methods, Chemical Vapour Deposition, LASER chemical Vapour Deposition, Photo

Chemical Vapour Deposition, Plasma enhanced Vapour Deposition, Metal Organo Chemical Vapour Deposition, Chemical Bath Deposition, Electro less Deposition, Anodisation, Liquid Phase Epitaxy, Sol-Gel method, Spin Coating, Spray-Pyrolysis Technique, Polymer Assisted Deposition

UNIT 4 THIN FILM CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. Cyclic Voltammetry and Linear Sweep Techniques, Thickness measurement Techniques, X-Ray Diffraction

Technique, Raman Spectral Study, Scanning Electron Microscopy, Energy Dispersive Analysis by X-rays measurements, Atomic Force Microscopy

UNIT 5 NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 9 Hrs.

Digital and Switching abstraction, Quantum Cellular Automata (QCA), Realization of logic gates using QCA, Types and synthesis of molecular bundles, principle and types of spin wave devices, Array minimum/ maximum computation with spin wave devices

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. George W Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Prentice Hall, 2008.

2. Karl Goser, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices”, Springer, First edition, 2005.

3. Rainer Waser (Ed), “Nanoelectronics and Information Technology”, Second Edition, Wiley VCH, 2003.

4. Mary Eshaghian-Wilner, “Bio inspired and Nano Scale Integrated Computing”, Wiley, 2009.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 80: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 94 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1616 PATTERN RECOGNITION AND IMAGE VISION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To comprehend the concepts of pattern recognition x To study the various methodologies of object detection in pattern recognition x To acquire knowledge about pattern classifications x To study the various classifiers like fuzzy and neural classifiers x To understand the concept of image extraction through computer vision and boundary analysis

UNIT 1 PRINCIPLES OF PATTERN RECOGNITION 9 Hrs. Patterns and features, training and learning in pattern recognition approach, different types of pattern

recognition. Statistical pattern recognition, feature selection, syntactic pattern recognition, clustering and non-supervised learning methods.

UNIT 2 OBJECT DETECTION METHODOLOGIES 9 Hrs. Combined detection method, edge detection, edge linking, gradient. Laplacian, line detection, method based,

point detection, snake methods. Boundary description detection, matching, merges segmentation, smoothing, splitting of boundaries syntactic, analysis of region boundaries, study of shape by region analysis.

UNIT 3 PATTERN CLASSIFICATION 9 Hrs. Distance Functions - Pattern classification by distance functions - Minimum distance classification - Cluster and

cluster seeking algorithms - Pattern classification by likelihood functions. Statistical Functions - Pattern classification using Statistical classifiers - Bayes’ classifier - Classification performance measures - Risk and error probabilities.

UNIT 4 PATTERN RECOGNITION 9 Hrs. Fuzzy Classifiers- Fuzzy and crisp classification - Fuzzy clustering - Fuzzy pattern recognition - Syntactic pattern recognition - Selection of primitives - Syntax analysis for pattern recognition.

Neural Classifiers - Introduction - Neural network structures for PR, Neural network based pattern associators - Feed forward networks trained by back propagation - ART networks.

UNIT 5 IMAGE EXTRACTION CONCEPTS 9 Hrs. Introduction of Computer Vision, Computer Imaging System, Image Formation and sensing CVIP tools

Software, Image representation. Area Extraction, Concepts, Data-structures, Edge, Line- Linking, Hough transform, Line fitting, Curve fitting.

Introduction - Boundary Analysis and Matching Region Analysis: Region properties, External points, spatial moments, mixed spatial gray-level moments, Boundary analysis- Signature properties, Shape numbers. General Frame Works for Matching, Distance relational approach,

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Dude, Hart, and Stock, "Pattern Classification", John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2001.

2. Gose, Johnsonbaugh and Jost, "Pattern Recognition and Image Analysis", Prentice Hall; Har/Dsk Edition, 1996.

3. D. Forsyth and J. Ponce , “Computer Vision - A modern approach”, Pearson, 2012.

4. B. K. P. Horn , “Robot Vision”, McGraw-Hill, 1986.

5. Milan Sonka,Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, "Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision" , 2007.

6. Robert Haralick and Linda Shapiro, "Computer and Robot Vision", Vol I & II, Addison-Wesley, 1993.

7. Christoper M Bishop, “Neural Network for pattern recognition”, Oxford university press, 2008.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

(Distribution may be 20% Theory & 80% Numerical)

Page 81: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 95 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1617 ADVANCED ELECTRONIC TEST ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE, ETCE and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The primary goal of the course is to introduce the concepts of automated test engineering techniques applied

for testing complex printed circuit board assemblies. On completion of the course the students will learn x

Analog/Digital/Mixed signal devices testing and Functional model development.

x PCBA functional testing methods

x Testing of BGAs/Boundary Scan components in PCBs x Test pattern generation

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PCB TECHNOLOGY 9 Hrs. Printed Circuit Boards(PCB) - Construction - Types of PCB - Multilayer - Surface Mount technology - PCB

Manufacturing process - PCB Inspection methods - Bare Board Testing - Optical and X-Ray Inspection - Electrical tests - Text fixtures - Bed of nails fixtures - Cross talk test - Mock up test - In circuit test – Burn-in-test - Fault diagnostic methods. Electromagnetic compatibility testing of electronic components, subassemblies, Measuring Instruments and systems

UNIT 2 PCB TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCESS 9 Hrs. Symptom Recognition - Bracketing Technique - Component failure Analysis - Fault types and causes in circuits

- during manufacturing - Manual trouble shooting technique - Tools and Instruments DMM - CRO - PCO - Logic probes - Logic pulsar - Logic Analyzer.

UNIT 3 AUTOMATED TROUBLE SHOOTING TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. ATE Techniques - CPU Emulator technique - ROM amd ROM Emulators - In circuit Comparator - In Circuit

Functional test - Trouble shooting digital gates - Testing Linear Integrated Circuits - Guarding Technique - VI trace Technique - Bus Cycle Signature System - Board functional test methods - Boundary scan test basics.

UNIT 4 ATE SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE 9 Hrs. ATE System Components - Digital Pin Electronics - Drive data formats - Digital High way - Analog Highway - Test Vector Generation - Creating test patterns - Fault Simulations.

UNIT 5 DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY (DFT) 9 Hrs. MDA test systems - Boundary scan test with I/O pin compatibility - Automatic optical inspection systems -

Combinational ATE Systems - Design for testability - Observability and Controllability - Testing Flow diagram - Stuck at fault model - Fault simulation - Ad Hoc technique - Scan design technique - Basics of ATPG - BIST-Test pattern generation for built in self test - Exhaustive pattern generation and deterministic testing - Output response Analysis - Transition count syndrome checking - Signature Analysis - Circular BIST.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Michael L.Bushnell et al., “Essentials of Electronic testing for digital, memory and mixed signal VLSI circuit”,1st edition, Academic Press, 2002.

2. Randall L Geiger, Pillip E Allen, “VLSI design techniques for analog and digital circuits”, MGH,1990.

3. Parag.K.lala, “Digital circuit Testing and Testability”, 1st edition, Academic press, 2001.

4. Alfred L.Crouch, “Design for test for Digital ICs and Embedded core systems”, 2nd edition, PHI, 1999

5. Sabapathy S.R., “Test Engineering for electronic hardware”, Qmax publishers, 1st Edition, 2007.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 20% Theory & 80% Numerical)

Page 82: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 96 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1618 PROGRAMMING IN MATLAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EEE, E&C, EIE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To understand basic representation of Matrices and vectors in MATLAB x

To learn various programming structures in MATLAB x To study built in and user defined functions in MATLAB. x To become conversant with 2D as well as 3D graphics in MATLAB x To make a Graphical User Interface (GUI) in Matlab in order to achieve interactivity x

To Design simple Applications with Simulink (mdl files) and (M files) MATLAB.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB 9 Hrs. Menus & Tool bars, Variables - Matrices and Vectors - initializing vectors - Data types- Functions - User defined

functions - passing arguments - writing data to a file-reading data from a file - using functions with vectors and matrices- cell arrays & structures - Strings - 2D strings-String comparing - Concatenation - Input and Output statements - Script files .

UNIT 2 LOOPS & CONTROL STATEMENTS 9 Hrs. Introduction; Relational & Logical operations - Example programs - Operator precedence - Control & Decision

statements- IF - IF ELSE - NESTED IF ELSE - SWITCH - TRY & CATCH - FOR -WHILE - NESTED FOR - FOR with IF statements, MATLAB program organization, Debugging methods - Error trapping using eval & lastern commands.

UNIT 3 PLOTS IN MATLAB & GUI 9 Hrs. Basic 2D plots, Labels, Line style, Markers, plot, subplot, LOG, LOG-LOG, SEMILOG-POLAR-COMET, Grid

axis, labeling, fplot, ezplot, ezpolar, polyval, exporting figures, HOLD, STEM, BAR, HIST, Interactive plotting, Basic Fitting Interface – Polyfit - 3D plots – Mesh - Contour - Example programs. GUI - Creation Fundamentals - Capturing mouse actions

UNIT 4 MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS 9 Hrs. File & Directory management - Native Data Files - Data import & Export - Low Level File I/O - Directory

management - FTP File Operations - Time Computations -Date & Time - Format Conversions - Date & Time Functions - Plot labels - Optimization - zero Finding - Minimization in one Dimension - Minimization in Higher Dimensions- Practical Issues. Differentiation & Integration using MATLAB, 1D & 2D Data Interpolation

UNIT 5 SIMULINK & APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. How to create & run Simulink, Simulink Designing - Using SIMULINK Generating an AM signal & 2n d order

systems - Designing of FWR & HWR using Simulink - Creating a subsystem in Simulink. Applications Programs - Frequency response of FIR & IIR filters. Open Loop gain of OPAMP, I/P characteristics of BJT, Plotting the graph between Breakdown voltage & Doping Concentration. PCM, DPCM

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Rudra Pratap, “Getting Started with MATLAB 6.0” ,1st Edition, Oxford University Press-2004.

2. Duane Hanselman ,Bruce LittleField, “Mastering MATLAB 7” , Pearson Education Inc, 2005

3. William J.Palm, “Introduction to MATLAB 6.0 for Engineers”, Mc Graw Hill & Co, 2001

4. M.Herniter, “Programming in MATLAB”, Thomson Learning, 2001

5. John Okyere Altla, “Electronics and circuit analysis using MATLAB” - CRC press, 1999

6. K.K.Sharma, “MATLAB Demustifyied” -Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd.

7. K.C.Ravindaranath, “Systems Modelling & Simulation”

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 83: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 97 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1619 RADAR AND NAVIGATIONAL AIDS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE and E&I) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To acquaint the students with the concept of Radar, its basic principle and operation, its types. x

On completion of this course, the students will

x Acquire complete knowledge on RADAR and its various types

x Acquire knowledge on different transmitters and receivers used in RADAR systems x

Acquire knowledge on advanced RADAR concepts

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO RADAR 9 Hrs. Origin of Radar, Block diagram of Radar, Radar frequencies, simple form of Radar equation and considerations,

applications of Radar. Integration of Radar Pulses-Radar Cross Section of Targets and its fluctuations, Prediction of Range Performance, Minimum Detectable Signal, Radar Clutter-surface clutter, sea clutter and Land clutter ,weather clutter. Pulse Repetition Frequency and Range ambiguities.

UNIT 2 BASIC AND MTI RADAR, TRACKING 9 Hrs. Principle of basic radar, simple block diagram of radar, radar range equations, basic pulsed radar, CW radar,

Doppler Effect, FMCW radar, factors affecting the radar operation. Delay line canceller, blind speed, types of MTI radars, Digital MTI Processing - Moving Target Detector - Limitations to MTI Performance - MTI from a Moving Platform.

UNIT 3 RADAR TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9 Hrs. Types of Radar transmitters - Radar Modulators, Linear Beam Power Tubes - Solid State RF Power Sources -

Magnetron - Crossed Field Amplifiers - Other RF Power Sources - Radar transmitter monitoring and testing Noise Figure of Radar receivers - Super heterodyne Receiver - Duplexers and Receiver Protectors- Radar

Displays.

UNIT 4 DETECTION OF SIGNALS IN NOISE 9 Hrs. Introduction - Matched Filter Receiver - Detection Criteria - Detectors - Automatic Detector - Integrators -

Constant-False-Alarm-Rate Receivers - The Radar operator - Signal Management - Propagation of Radar Waves - Atmospheric Refraction - Standard propagation - Nonstandard Propagation - The Radar Antenna - Reflector Antennas - Electronically Steered Phased Array Antennas - Phase Shifters - Frequency-Scan Arrays

UNIT 5 ADVANCED RADARS AND RADAR NAVIGATION 9 Hrs. Pulse Doppler Radar, mono-pulse radar, sequential lobbing radar, conical scan radars, MST radars, Synthetic

Aperture Radars (SAR) - Principle of operation and characteristic parameters. Phased array radars - salient features, advantages and limitations of Phased Array Radars.

Elementary ideas of Navigation Aids : VOR, DME, DVOR, TACAN, ILS and MLS, GPS, Automatic Direction finder, Hyperbolic Navigation (LORAN, DECA, OMEGA).

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Merrill I.Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill (3rd Edition) 2003.

2. N.S.Nagaraja, “Elements of Electronic Navigation Systems”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2000.

3. Peyton Z. Peebles:, "Radar Principles", John Wiley, 2004

4. J.C Toomay, " Principles of Radar", 2nd Edition -PHI, 2004

5. Dr.A K Sen and Dr. AB Bhattacharya, “Radar Systems and Radio Aids to Navigation”, Khanna Publishers, 1988.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 84: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 98 REGULATIONS 2015

SEC1621 SPREAD SPECTRUM COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x On completion of this course, the students will, x Understand the basic principles and building blocks of digital communication system, mathematical background and Sequence generator fundamentals and to analyze error performance of spread spectrum modulation formats and anti-jamming capability of spread spectrum signals.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Basic digital communication concepts, Impact of wide band, Detection of binary signals in additive white

Gaussian Noise, Differences between standard narrow-band communication systems and spread spectrum systems. Spread-spectrum waveforms & its characteristics, spread spectrum communication system model, Techniques for reducing the impact of interference on spread spectrum signals, Jamming considerations

UNIT 2 BINARY SHIFT-REGISTER SEQUENCES AND CODE TRACKING LOOPS 9 Hrs. Definitions , mathematical Background and Sequence generator fundamentals, Maximal-length Sequences,

Direct Sequence and Spreading Codes Walsh Code, Pseudo Random Code, Mean and Variance of Random Codes Gold codes, Nonlinear code generators. Optimum tracking of wideband signals, Baseband Delay-lock Tracking Loop, Non-coherent Delay-lock Tracking loop, Tau-Dither non-coherent tracking loop, Double-Dither Non-coherent Tracking loop, Non-coherent Delay-Lock Tracking loop with arbitrary data and spreading modulation, Code tracking loops for Frequency-Hop systems.

UNIT 3 DIRECT -SEQUENCE AND FREQUENCY- HOPPED SPREAD SPECTRUM 9 Hrs. Types and advantages of spread spectrum modulation formats- BPSK, QPSK, MSK Direct -Sequence spread

spectrum, coherent slow- Frequency hopped spread spectrum, non-coherent slow and fast Frequency hopped spread spectrum Hybrid Direct-sequence/Frequency-Hop spread spectrum, Complex-Envelop Representation of spread- spectrum systems

UNIT 4 SYNCHRONIZATION AND PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Problem definition and the optimum synchronizer, serial search synchronization techniques, general analysis of

average synchronization time, synchronization using a matched filter, synchronization by estimating the received spreading code, tracking loop pull-in, performance of spread spectrum system without coding, performance of spread spectrum system with forward error correction

UNIT 5 CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS 9 Hrs. Cellular radio concept, CDMA digital cellular systems, examples of CDMA digital cellular systems, cellular

CDMA applications, Analyze the performance of spread spectrum signals in the presence of multiple access interference (CDMA context), Calculation of theoretical capacity of a CDMA system, coding and decoding processes in CDMA, effects of interference in CDMA, and synchronization in CDMA wireless communication systems. 3G wireless systems using CDMA technologies, Major factors influencing the capacity of CDMA wireless networks, Multicarrier CDMA, Rake receivers wireless LAN applications, commercial and military applications.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. R. L. Peterson, R. E. Ziemer, and D. E. Borth, “Introduction to Spread Spectrum Communications”, Prentice Hall, 2005 (ISBN

81-297-0973-2) 2. R. C. Dixon, “Spread Spectrum Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 1994, ISBN: 0471593427 3. D R Kamilo Feher, “Wireless digital communications Modulation & Spread Spectrum Applications”, Prentice Hall of India,1999,

ISBN 81-203-1472-7. 4. Andreas F.Molisch, “Wideband Wireless Digital Communications”, Pearson Education, ISBN 81-7808-301-9,2003. 5. A. J. Viterbi, “CDMA: Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication”, Addison-Wesley,1995, ISBN: 0201633744 6. Bernard Sklar, Pabitra Kumar Ray, “Digital Communications”, Pearson, ISBN 978-81 -31 7-2092-9,2009

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 85: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 99 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1601 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To have a detailed knowledge in various reactive power compensators

x To understand the implementation of FACTS controllers in improvement of power system performance

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

Electrical Transmission Network – Emerging Transmission Network – Concept of Reactive Power – Load and System Compensation – Midpoint Voltage – Passive Compensation – Synchronous Condenser – Saturated Reactor

– Classification of FACTS controllers.

UNIT 2 SHUNT COMPENSATION 9 Hrs.

Thyristor Controlled Reactor (TCR) – Thyristor Switched Reactor (TSR) – Thyristor Switched Capacitor (TSC)

– Fixed Capacitor- Thyristor Controlled Reactor (FC-TCR) – Thyristor Switched Capacitor-Thyristor Controlled Reactor (TSC -TCR) – V-I Characteristics of Static Var Compensator (SVC) – Advantages of slope in dynamic Characteristic – Voltage control by SVC.

UNIT 3 THYRISTOR CONTROLLED SERIES CAPACITOR (TCSC) 9 Hrs.

Fixed Series Compensation – Need for Variable Series Compensation – TCSC: Basic principle – Modes of Operation – Advantages – Capability Characteristic – Variable Reactance Model – Application: Open loop & Closed loop Control.

UNIT 4 EMERGING FACTS CONTROLLER 9 Hrs.

Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM): Introduction – Principle of Operation – V-I Characteristic. Multilevel VSC based STATCOM. SSSC: Principle of Operation. Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC): Principle of Operation. Interline Power Flow Controller (IPFC): Principle of Operation.

UNIT 5 SUB SYNCHRONOUS RESONANCE (SSR) 9 Hrs. Concept of SSR – NGH-SSR Damping scheme: basic concept – design and operation aspect. Thyristor

Controlled Braking Resistor (TCBR), Advanced Series Capacitor (ASC): Basic concept – design and operation aspect

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. R.Mohan Mathur and Rajiv K. Varma “Thyristor based FACTS controllers for electrical transmission systems”, IEEE Press John Wiley & Sons Inc. Publication, 2002.

2. Narin G.Hingorani and Laszlo Gyugi “Understanding FACTS”, IEEE Press Standard Publishers Distributors, 2001

3. K.R.Padiyar “FACTS controllers in power transmission and distribution”, New Age International Publishers, 2009.

4. M.Noroozian et.al, “ Use of UPFC for optimal power flow control”’ Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol.12, No.4, oct 1997, pp

1629-1634 5. Gyugyi.L, ‘Unified Power Flow Control Concept for Flexible AC Transmission”, IEEE Proc-C Vol.139, N0.4, July 1992

6. Rakosh Das Begamudre, “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 86: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 100 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1602 POWER SYSTEM DYNAMICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To impart knowledge on modeling of machines, excitation system and stability analysis.

UNIT1 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE MODELING 9 Hrs.

Mathematical description of a synchronous machine; Review of magnetic circuit equations, Basic equations of a synchronous machine, Per unit (pu) representation: pu system for the stator quantities, pu stator voltage equations, pu rotor voltage equations, Stator flux linkage equations, Rotor flux linkage equations, pu system for the rotor, pu power and torque, Alternative per unit systems and transformations- Equivalent circuits for direct and Quadrature axes-constant flux linkage model, Classical model, Constant flux linkage model including the effects of sub transient circuits.

UNIT2 INDUCTION MOTOR AND SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MODELING 9 Hrs.

Modeling of Induction motors: Equations of an induction machine - Steady State Characteristics - Alternative rotor constructions - Representation of saturation - Per unit Representation – Representation in stability studies - Synchronous motor model.

UNIT3 EXCITATION SYSTEM 9 Hrs.

Excitation system requirements - Elements of an excitation system - Types of Excitation system: DC Excitation systems, AC Excitation systems, Static Excitation systems - Control and Protective Functions: AC and DC regulators, Excitation system Stabilizing circuits, Power System Stabilizer(PSS), Load Compensation, Under Excitation limiter, Over Excitation limiter, Volts-per-Hertz limiter and protection, Field shorting systems - Modeling of Excitation systems.

UNIT 4 SMALL-SIGNAL STABILITY 9 Hrs. Fundamental concept of stability of Dynamic Systems – Small Signal Stability of a Single-Machine Infinite Bus System - Effects of Excitation System - Power System Stabilizer - Small Signal Stability of Multi Machine Systems.

UNIT 5 TRANSIENT STABILITY 9 Hrs. Elementary view of Transient Stability - Simulation of Power System Dynamic Response - Direct Method of

Transient Stability Analysis: Description of the Transient Energy Function Approach, Analysis of Practical Power Systems - Limitations of the Direct Methods.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. P.Kundur, “Power system stability and control”, McGraw Hill Inc:USA,2006

2. R.Ramanujam, “ Power System Dynamics”,Phi learning, 2010.

3. M.A.Pai and W.Saueer, “ Power system dynamics and stabilities”, Pearson Education Asia,India,2002.

4. Edward Wilson kimbark, “ Power systems stability”, volume III, John Wiley &Sons,Inc,2004.

5. K.R.Padiyar, “Power System Dynamics”, Anshan Pvt Ltd, 2004.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 87: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 101 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1603 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To understand electric power system operation.

x To understand electric power system steady state control.

x To understand economic and technical feasible operating state.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

System Load Variation: System Load Characteristics, Load curves - Daily, Weekly and Annual, Load Duration Curve, Load Factor, Diversity Factor, Reserve Requirements: Installed reserves, Spinning Reserves, Cold Reserves, and Hot Reserves. Overview of system operation: Load Forecasting, Unit Commitment, Load Dispatching. Overview of system control: Governor Control, LFC, EDC, AVR, System Voltage Control, Security control.

UNIT 2 ACTIVE POWER AND FREQUENCY CONTROL 9 Hrs. Fundamentals of Speed Governing - Control of Generating Unit Power Output - Composite Regulating

Characteristics of Power Systems - Response rates of Turbine Governing Systems - Fundamentals of automatic generation control - Implementation of AGC - Under Frequency Load Shedding.

UNIT 3 REACTIVE POWER AND VOLTAGE CONTROL 9 Hrs. Production and Absorption of Reactive Power - Methods of Voltage Control - shunt Reactors, Shunt Capacitors,

Series Capacitors, Synchronous Condensers, Static var Systems-Principles of Transmission System Compensation – Modeling of Reactive Compensation Devices - Application of Tap-Changing Transformers to Transmission Systems - Distribution System Voltage Regulation - Modeling of Transformer ULTC Control System.

UNIT 4 COMMITMENT AND ECONOMIC LOAD DISPATCH 9 Hrs. Statement of unit commitment (UC) problem-constraints in UC: Spinning Reserve, Thermal unit Constraints,

Hydro Constraints, Fuel Constraints and other Constraints - UC solution methods: Priority-List Methods, Forward Dynamic Programming Approach, Langrange Relaxation Method. Economic Load Dispatch: Incremental Cost Curves – Equal Incremental Cost Rule – Loss Coefficient – Coordination Equation.

UNIT 5 COMPUTER CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Energy control system: Function-monitoring, Data Acquisition and Control, System Hardware

Configuration-Scada and Ems Function: Network Topology Determination, Steady State Estimate, Security Analysis and Control. Various operating states: normal, Alert, emergency: Extremely Emergency and Restorative- State Transition Diagram Showing Various State Transition and Control Strategies.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. P.Kundur, “Power system stability & control”, Tata McGraw Hill publications, 5th reprint 2006. 2. Allen J. Wood, Bruce F. Wollenberg, Gerald B. Sheble, “Power generation, operation and control”, John Wiley & sons, Inc, 3rd

Edition, 2013. 3. Olle.I.Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems theory” – An Introduction, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Copmpany Ltd, NewDelhi, 2nd

Edition, 2004. 4. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, “Modern power system analysis”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw hill publishing company limited,

NewDelhi, 2011. 5. Leonard L.Grigsby, “The Electric Power Engineering Handbook”, CRC press press, 3 rd edition 2012.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 88: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 102 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1604 EHV AC AND DC TRANSMISSION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To understand bulk power transmission system.

x To understand issues, advantage and alternate of bulk power transmission.

UNIT 1 TRANSMISSION ENGINEERING 9 Hrs. Transmission Line Trends – Standard Transmission Voltages – Power Handling Capacity and Line Losses – Cost of Transmission Lines and Equipments – Mechanical Consideration – Transmission Engineering Principles.

UNIT 2 LINE PARAMETER 9 Hrs. Calculation of Line and Ground Parameters – Resistance, Capacitance and Inductance Calculation – Bundle Conductors – Modes of Propagation – Effect of Earth.

UNIT 3 POWER CONTROL 9 Hrs. Power Frequency and Voltage Control – Over Voltages – Power Circle Diagram – Voltage Control Using Shunt and Series Compensation – Static VAR Compensation – Higher phase order system – FACTS.

UNIT 4 EHV AC TRANSMISSION 9 Hrs. Design of EHV Lines based on Steady State Limits and Transient over Voltages – Design of Extra HV Cable Transmission – XLPE cables – Gas Insulated Cables – Corona and RIV.

UNIT 5 HVDC TRANSMISSION 9 Hrs. HVDC Transmission Principles – Comparison of HVAC and HVDC Transmission – Economics – Types of

converters – HVDC rules – HVDC control – Harmonics – filters – Multi terminal DC system – HVDC cables and HVDC circuit Breakers.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Padiyar, K.R., “HVDC Power Transmission System”, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, New Delhi, 1st Edition, Reprint 2005.

2. Rakosh Das Begamudre, “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.

3. Allan Greenwood, “Electrical Transients in Power system”, John Wiley & Sons, Newyork, 2010

4. Arrillaga, J., “ High Voltage Direct Current Transmission”, The Institution of Electrical Engineers, London, 1998.

5. Rao.S, “EHV-AC,HVDC Transmission & Distribution Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2001

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 89: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 103 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1605

POWER SYSTEM RESTRUCTURING AND DEREGULATION

L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To impart knowledge in Deregulation and Restructuring of power systems. x

To understand different trading and pricing in deregulated market.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO DEREGULATION AND RESTRUCTURING 9 Hrs.

Gencos, Transco’s, Discos, Customers, ISO, Market operators. Privatization, An overview of the Restructured Power System, Difference between Integrated Power System and Restructured Power System, Transmission Open Access, Wheeling, Power Systems Operation – Old Vs New, Key issues associated with the Restructuring of ESIs, Advantages of Competitive System.

UNIT 2 DEREGULATION OF POWER SECTOR 9 Hrs. Separation of ownership and operation, Deregulated models – Pool Model, Pool and Bilateral Trade’s Model, Multilateral Trade Model.

UNIT 3 COMPETITIVE ELECTRICITY MARKET 9 Hrs. Independent System Operator activities in Pool Market, wholesale Electricity Market Characteristics, Central

Auction, Single Auction Power Pool, Double Auction Power Pool, Market Clearing And Pricing, Market Power and its Mitigation Techniques, Bilateral Trading, Ancillary Services.

UNIT 4 TRANSMISSION PRICING 9 Hrs. Marginal pricing of Electricity, nodal pricing, zonal pricing, embedded cost, postage stamp method, contract path method, boundary flow method, MW-mile method, MVA-mile method, comparison of different methods.

UNIT 5 CONGESTION MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs.

Total Transfer Capability – Limitations – Margins – Available Transfer Capability (ATC) – Procedure – methods to compute ATC – Static and Dynamic ATC – Bid, Zonal and Node Congestion Principles – Inter and Intra zonal congestion – Generation Rescheduling – Transmission Congestion Contracts.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Loi Lei Loi, “ Power System Restructuring and Deregulation – Trading, performance& information technology”, John Wiley sons,2001.

2. Kankar Bhattarcharya, et,al., “Operation of restructured power systems”, Springer US, 2012.

3. S. A. Khaparde and A. R. Abhyankar, “Restructured Power Systems”, Alpha Science Intl Ltd,201 1.

4. Mohammad Shahidehpour, Hatim Yamin, Zuyi Li, “Market Operations in Electric Power Systems: Forecasting, Scheduling, and Risk Management”, Wiley-Blackwell, March 2002.

5. Mohammad Shahidehpour and Muwaffaq Almoush, “Restructured Electrical Power Systems Operation, Trading and Volatility,” Marcel Dekkar, Inc, 2001.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 90: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 104 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1606 STATIC RELAYS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To study and understand the working of comparators Relays in power system protection. x To study and implement

the advance microprocessor relays in power system protection

UNIT 1 PHASE AND AMPLITUDE COMPARATORS 9 Hrs.

Phase and Amplitude Comparators – Duality between them – Types – Direct and Integrating Rectifier Bridge, Circulating Current Opposed Voltage Coincident type Phase Comparator, Direct or Block Spike Phase comparator, Phase Splitting Techniques, Integrating type Phase Comparator with Transistor AND Gate – Hybrid comparator – Hall Effect type and magneto resistivity type, Vector Product type – Zener Diode Phase Comparator – Multi Input – Three Input Coincident Comparator/Phase Sequence Detector.

UNIT 2 SOLID STATE PROTECTIVE RELAYS 9 Hrs. Static relay circuits using analog and digital IC’s for over current, Differential and Directional Relays

UNIT 3 SOLID STATE POWER SYSTEM ELEMENT PROTECTION 10 Hrs. Static Relay Circuits for Generator Loss of Field, Under Frequency, Distance, Impedance, Reactance, Mho and Reverse power Relays - Static Relay Circuits for Carrier Current Protection.

UNIT 4 ANALYSIS OF SOLID STATE RELAYS 8 Hrs. Steady State and Transient Behavior of Static Relays – Testing and Maintenance of Relays – Tripping Circuits Using Thyristors

UNIT 5 MICROPROCESSOR BASED RELAYS Microprocessor Based Relays – Hardware and Software for the Measurement of Voltage, Current, Frequency and

Phase Angle – Microprocessor Based Implementation of Over Current, Directional, Impedance and Mho Relays.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Van.C.Warington, “Protective Relays-their Theory and Practice”, vol I&II, Champ Man and Hall Ltd, London, 1978.

2. T.S.Madhava Rao, “Power System Protection, Static Relays with Microprocessor Applications”, Tata Mc- Graw Hill, Second edition, New Delhi, 2004.

3. S.P.Patra, S.K.Basu, S.Choudhri, “Power System Protection”, Oxford and IBM publishing Co., New Delhi, 1983.

4. Ram.B, “Fundamental of Microprocessors and Micro computers”, reprint 1997.

5. Sunil S.Rao, “Switchgear Protection & Power Systems”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi 2014.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 91: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 105 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1607 RENEWABLE ELECTRIC SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To understand the need and advantages of renewable energy.

x To study the performance ,efficiency and the relevancy to the future energy needs.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

Classification of Energy Resources - Importance of Non Conventional Energy Resources - Advantages and Disadvantages of Non-Conventional Energy Resources - Environmental Aspects of Energy - World Energy status - Energy scenario in India - Principles of Energy Conservation – Cogeneration.

UNIT 2 SOLAR ENERGY 9 Hrs

Theory of solar cells - VI and PV curves - Equivalent circuit. Concept of solar PV module, Panel, Array, Maximum Power Point tracking - Solar PV systems - Solar PV Applications. Solar Thermal Systems-Solar Collector’s Classifications- Flat plate collectors - Focus type collectors – Solar Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning System - Solar Pond Power Plant - Solar Thermal Power Plant.

UNIT 3 WIND ENERGY 9 Hrs. Wind Power and its Sources-Energy from Wind - Horizontal axis Wind Turbine - Vertical Axis Wind Turbine - Wind Energy Conversion Systems - Cp Vs Speed Curve.

UNIT 4 GEOTHERMAL, BIOMASS, TIDAL ENERGY 9 Hrs. Geothermal Energy:-Resources of geothermal energy- environmental considerations. Bio-mass-Availability of

bio-mass and its conversion technologies-Biogas production from Bio-mass. Tidal energy-tidal range power-ocean tidal energy conversion-Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion technology (OTEC)

UNIT 5 FUEL CELL AND MISCELLANEOUS NONCONVENTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES 9 Hrs. Fuel Cells - Principle of Working - Classification of Fuel Cells - Construction, Working and Performance of

Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cell and Alkaline Fuel Cell - VI Characteristics of Fuel Cell - Fuel Cell Power Plant - MHD Power Conversion-Thermo Electric Power Conversion - Thermionic Power Conversion.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. B Khan ,“Non conventional Energy resources”, Tata McGrawHill, 2 nd Edition 2009.

2. Mukund R. Patel ,Wind & Solar Power Systems- Design, Analysis and Operation, , Taylor and Francis, 2n d Edition 2005.

3. James Larminie & Andrew Dicks, “Fuel Cell Systems Explained”, John Wiely & Sons, 2nd Edition.

4. John Twideu and Tony Weir, “Renewal Energy Resources” BSP Publications, 2006.

5. C.S. Solanki, “Renewal Energy Technologies: A Practical Guide for Beginners” PHI Learning.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 92: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 106 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1608 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) _______________________ 3 __ 0 __ 0 ____ 3 _______ 100 __

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To give an exposure to basic concepts of PSPICE and MATLAB.

x To make the students to design and simulate circuits using the above software.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PSPICE 8 Hrs. Description of Spice- Limitations- Circuit Descriptions- DC Circuit Analysis- Transient Analysis- AC Analysis-Parametric - Sub circuit - Fourier analysis - programs based on DC, AC and Transient Analysis.

UNIT-2 DEVICEMODELLING 12 Hrs. Analysis of Diode, Bipolar Junction transistor, Field Effect transistor - Op Amp Circuits - Spice AC and DC models – Parameters - Examples circuits.

UNIT3 MATLAB INTRODUCTION 10 Hrs. Basic features – Script m files – Array and array operations – Data types – Cell array and structures – Relational and logical operations – Control flow – Functions – Plotting commands – Mat lab toolbox – Simulink.

UNIT 4 MATLAB ANALYSIS 10 Hrs.

DC Analysis – Nodal Analysis, Loop Analysis, Maximum power Transfer. Transient Analysis - RC, RL, RLC circuit, State Variable Approach. AC Analysis and Network Functions – Steady State AC Circuit, Single and Three Phase AC Circuit, Network Characteristics – Frequency Response. Two port Network – Z, Y, H Parameter Analysis, Transmission parameters.

UNIT 5 MATLAB APPLICATIONS 10 Hrs.

Characteristics Realization of Diodes – I-V curve, operating point, full wave rectifier. Characteristics realization of Op-Amps – open loop gain, closed loop gain, Transfer function, poles and zeros- Characteristic realization of transistor, BJT, MOSFET.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. John Okyere Attia, "Electronic and Circuit Analysis Using MATLAB" CRC Press, 2004.

2. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Introduction to PSPICE using ORCAD for circuits and electronics”,3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of india Private Limited,201 0.

3. Alok Jain, “Power Electronics: Devices, Circuits & Matlab Simulations”, Penram international Publication, 1st Edition

4. Mohammed Rashid, “Power Electronics circuits, Devices and Applications”,3rd edition, PHI publishing company,2010

5. Duane Hansel Man, “Mastering Matlab-7”,Bruce Little Field,Pearson education Ltd,Ist Edition,2009.

6. Cleve B.Moler, "Numerical Computing with Matlab, Society for Industrial & Applied Mathematics ", 2004.

7. John Okyere Attia, "PSPICE and MATLAB for Electronics" CRC Press, 2009

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 93: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 107 REGULATIONS 2015

SEE1609

COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To provide basics of electromagnetic field theory concepts.

x To introduce the concept of computer aided design of electrical equipment. x

To introduce CAD tools for design of electrical equipment.

UNIT1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Conventional Design Procedures – Limitations – Need for Field Analysis Based Design.

UNIT 2 MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION OF FIELD PROBLEMS 9 Hrs.

Electromagnetic Field Equations – Magnetic Vector/Scalar potential – Electrical vector /Scalar potential – Stored Energy in Field Problems – Inductance- Development of Torque/Force- Laplace and Poisson’s Equations – Energy Functional – Principle of Energy Conversion.

UNIT 3 PHILOSOPHY OF FEM 9 Hrs. Mathematical Models – Differential/Integral Equations – Finite Difference Method – Finite Element Method –

Energy Minimization – Variational Method - 2D Field Problems – Discretisation – Shape Functions – Stiffness Matrix – Solution Techniques.

UNIT 4 CAD PACKAGES 9 Hrs. Elements of a CAD System – Pre-Processing – Modeling – Meshing – Material Properties- Boundary Conditions – Setting up Solution – Post Processing.

UNIT 5 DESIGN APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Design of Solenoid Actuator – Induction Motor – Insulators – Power transformer.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. S.J Salon, “Finite Element Analysis of Electrical Machines.” Kluwer Academic Publishers, London, 1995.

2. S.R.H.Hoole, Computer – Aided, Analysis and Design of Electromagnetic Devices, Elsevier, New York, Amsterdam, London, 1989.

3. P.P. Silvester and Ferrari, “Finite Elements for Electrical Engineers” Cambridge University press, 3rd Edition1983.

4. D.A.Lowther and P.P Silvester, “Computer Aided Design in Magnetics”, Springer verlag, 1st Edition New York, 1986.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 94: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 108 REGULATIONS 2015

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

SIC1310 THEORY OF ROBOTICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, EEE, E&C, EIE and BIO-MED) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce basic concepts of various dynamics processes

To educate on the effect of various power sources and sensors.

To impart knowledge on the manipulators , grippers and robot dynamics To introduce the evaluation criteria and tuning techniques of controllers To introduce the concept of multi loop control techniques

UNIT 1 BASIC CONCEPTS 9 Hrs.

Origin & various generation of Robots - Robot definition - Robotics system components - Robot classification Coordinate frames - Asimov’s laws of robotics - degree of freedom - dynamic stabilization of robots.- work volume. Need for Automation - types of automation - fixed, programmable and flexible automation.

UNIT 2 POWER SOURCES AND SENSORS 9 Hrs.

Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives - determination of HP of motor and gearing ratio - variable speed arrangements - path determination - micro machines in robotics - machine vision - ranging - laser - acoustic - magnetic, fiber optic and tactile sensors.

UNIT 3 MANIPULATORS, ACTUATORS, GRIPPERS and ROBOT DYNAMICS 9 Hrs.

Construction of manipulators - manipulator dynamics and force control - electronic and pneumatic manipulator control circuits - end effectors - various types of grippers - design considerations. Introduction to Robot Dynamics - Lagrange formulation - Newton Euler formulation - Properties of robot dynamic equations.

UNIT 4 KINEMATICS AND PATH PLANNING 9 Hrs. Forward Kinematics - Denavit Hartenberg Representation. multiple solution jacobian work envelop, Inverse Kinematics - Geometric approach. Hill climbing techniques.

UNIT 5 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Robot programming - Fixed instruction, sequence control, General programming language, Specific

programming languages. Robots for welding, painting and assembly - Remote Controlled robots - robots in manufacturing and non- manufacturing applications - Robots for nuclear and chemical plants.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Mikell P. Weiss G.M., Nagel R.N., Odraj N.G., “Industrial Robotics”, McGraw-Hill Singapore, 1996.

2. Ghosh, “Control in Robotics and Automation: Sensor Based Integration”, Allied Publishers, Chennai, 1998.

3. Deb.S.R., “Robotics technology and flexible Automation”, John Wiley, USA 1992.

4. Asfahl C.R., “Robots and Manufacturing Automation”, John Wiley, USA 1992.

5. Klafter R.D., Chimielewski T.A., Negin M., “Robotic Engineering - An integrated approach”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 1994.

6. Mc Kerrow P.J. “Introduction to Robotics”, Addison Wesley, USA, 1991.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 95: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 109 REGULATIONS 2015

SIC1311 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, EEE, E&C and EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To familiarize use and requirements of medical instruments

To give knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments. An attempt to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments. To give an introductory idea about human physiology system .

UNIT 1 ELECTRO PHYSIOLOGY 8 Hrs.

Cell and Its Structure - Electrical, Mechanical and Chemical Activities - Action and Resting Potential- Organization of Nervous System - CNS - PNS - Neurons - Axons- Synapse - Propagation of Electrical Impulses along the Nerve-Sodium Pump - Cardio Pulmonary System- Physiology of Heart, Lung, Kidney.

UNIT 2 BIO POTENTIAL ELECTRODES AND TRANSDUCERS 8 Hrs. Design of Medical Instruments - Components of Biomedical Instrument System - Electrodes: Micro Electrodes,

Needle Electrodes, Surface Electrodes -Instrumentation amplifier - Biomedical Measurements Like pH, PCO2, PO2 of Blood, Isolation Amplifier, Preamplifier, Current Amplifier, Chopper Amplifier.

UNIT 3 INSTRUMENTS USED FOR DIAGNOSIS 10 Hrs.

ECG, Einthoven Triangle, Leads, Electrodes, Vector Cardiograph, Measurement of Cardiac Output, EEG, EMG ,Plethysmography, Blood Flow Measurements, Holter Monitor- Respiratory Rate Measurement - Oximeter, Patient Monitoring System, ICCU.

UNIT 4 MODERN IMAGING SYSTEM 10 Hrs. Ultrasonic Diagnosis, Ultrasonic Scanning, Isotopes in Medical Diagnosis- Pace Makers, Defibrillators, Doppler

Monitor(colour), Medical imaging-X-ray generation, Radiographic & Fluoroscopic Techniques - Image Intensifiers-Computer Aided Tomography, PET, SPECT- Laser Applications-Echocardiography-CT Scan-MRI/ NMR-Endoscopy.

UNIT 5 RECENT TRENDS & INSTRUMENTS FOR THERAPY 9 Hrs.

Dialysers - Surgical Diathermy - Electro Anaesthetic and Surgical Techniques. Sources of Electric Hazards and Safety Techniques. Single Channel Telemetry, Multi channel Telemetry, Implantable Telemetry, Wireless Telemetry,Telemedicine, Telemedicine Applications.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

18. 1. Khandpur, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

19. 2. Arumugam M, “Biomedical Instrumentation”, Anuradha Publications, Reprint 2009.

20. 3. Tompkins W J and Webster J G, "Design of Microcomputer Based Medical Instrumentation", Prentice Hall, 1991

21. 4. Geddes L A and Baker L E, "Principle of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation" 3rd Edition, Wiley, 1989

22. 5. Hill D.W, "Principle of Electronics for Medical Research", 2nd Edition, Butterworths, 1965.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max Marks : 80 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 96: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 110 REGULATIONS 2015

SIC1605 FIBRE OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, EEE, EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To expose the students to the basic concepts of optical fibres and their properties. x

To provide adequate knowledge about the Industrial applications of optical fibres. x To expose the students to the Laser fundamentals.

x To provide adequate knowledge about Industrial application of lasers. x To provide adequate knowledge about holography and Medical applications of Lasers.

UNIT 1 OPTICAL FIBRES AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS 9 Hrs. Quantum nature of light, optical laws and definitions- Principles of light propagation through a fiber -optical fiber

modes, configurations and their properties-fiber materials-fiber fabrication vapor phase oxidization - fiber characteristics - Absorption losses - Scattering losses - Dispersion - Connectors and splicers -fiber termination .

UNIT 2 OPTICAL SOURCES, DETECTORS AND SENSORS 9 Hrs. LED characteristics -LED structures: surface LED, edge emitting LED-Double heterojunction LED-Basic

concepts of Laser. Optical Detectors: PN Photo diode , Avalanche photo diode ,PIN diode, Photo transistor ,Photo thyristors ,Photo thermistor, opto-couplers ,optrodes, modulators.Fibre optic sensors - Fiber optic instrumentation system - Interferometric method of measurement of length - Moire-fringes - Measurement of pressure and temperature.

UNIT 3 LASER FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs. Laser Diode Rate Equation - External Quantum Efficiency- Resonant Frequencies - Three level and four level

lasers - Properties of laser -Laser modes - Resonator configuration - Q-switching and mode locking - Cavity damping - Types of lasers - Gas lasers, Solid lasers, Liquid lasers, Semiconductor lasers, Non-semiconductor lasers- The Nd:YAG laser and glass fiber lasers.

UNIT 4 LASER APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Optical transmitter and Receiver designs - Laser for measurement of distance, length, velocity, acceleration, current, voltage and atmospheric effect - material processing - Laser heating, welding, melting and trimming of materials - Removal and vaporization.

UNIT 5 HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATION 9 Hrs. Holography- Basic principle - methods - Holographic Interferometer and application - Holography for

non-destructive testing - Holographic Components - Medical applications of lasers, laser and tissue interactive - Laser instruments for surgery, tumor, vocal chords, brain surgery, plastic surgery, gynecology and oncology.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Senior J.M, “Optical Fibre Communication - Principles and Practice”, Prentice Hall of India,1985.

2. Wilson J and Hawkes J.F.B, “Introduction to Opto Electronics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001.

3. Keiser G, “Optical Fibre Communication”, McGraw Hill, 1995.

4. Arumugam M, “Optical Fibre Communication and Sensors”, Anuradha Agencies, 2002.

5. John F. Read, “Industrial Applications of Lasers”, Academic Press, 1978.

6. Monte Ross, “Laser Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1968.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 97: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 111 REGULATIONS 2015

SIC1607 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C and EEE) ____________________ 3 __ 0 __ 0 ____ 3 _______ 100 __

COURSE OBJECTIVES The theme of this subject is to make students learn the principle of operation and design of digital control systems.

To give an introductory idea about stability and state space analysis. To give knowledge of the Implementation of Control Algorithm in Microprocessor and Micro Controller.

UNIT 1 REVIEW OF SAMPLED DATA CONTROL SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Review of Sampled Data Control System - Sample and Hold Operation - Review of Z Transform- Pulse Transfer Function - Z Domain Equivalents to S Domain.

UNIT2 STABILITY ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Stability Analysis - Correlation between Time Response and Root Location in the Z Plane - Effect of Pole Zero Configuration in Z Plane - Transient Response of Sampled Data - Steady State Error-Methods of stability.

UNIT 3 STATE SPACE ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Discrete Time State Equation - State Diagram - Realization of Pulse Transfer Function - Direct Realization -

Cascade Realization - Parallel Realization - Sampled Data Model of Continuous Time System - Concepts of Controllability and Observability.

UNIT 4 DESIGN SPECIFICATION 9 Hrs. Transform of Digital Control System - Design Specification - Design on the W Plane - Digital PID Controller - Introduction to Design on the Z Plane.

UNIT 5 IMPLEMENTATION OF CONTROL ALGORITHM 9 Hrs. Implementation of Control Algorithm using Microprocessor and Micro Controller - Digital Quantization - Signal Quantization-Stepper motor control -Traffic light control.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gopal. M, “Digital Control Engineering”, Willey Eastern Publishers,1998.

2. Nagrath. I.J. “Control System Engineering”, New Age International, 2006.

3. Yoan D. Landau, Gianluca Zito, “Digital Control System: design, identification and implementation”, Springer, 2006.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 98: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 112 REGULATIONS 2015

SIC1608 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To Familiarize about different power generation process, various measurements & analysis in power plants, types of controls and control loops in boilers

x To provide in-depth understanding of nuclear power plant.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Brief survey methods of power generation - hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and wind power - Importance of

instrumentation in power generation - Piping and instrumentation diagram of a thermal power plant - Boiler types - water tube - fire tube - fluidized bed - Fuels - coal, fuel oil, natural and petroleum gas, synthetic fuels and biomass - Combustion process - Combustion of solid fuel, Combustion of fuel oil, combustion of gas - Cogeneration

UNIT 2 MEASUREMENTS IN POWER PLANTS 9 Hrs Metal temperature measurement in boilers, piping system for pressure measuring devices, Flow of feed water -

fuel, air and steam with correction factor for temperature and pressure - smoke and dust monitor, flame monitoring. Drum level measurement - Radiation detector - Introduction to turbine supervising system - pedestal vibration - shaft vibration - eccentricity measurement. Installation of non-contracting transducers for speed measurement - rotor and casing movement and expansion measurement

UNIT 3 CONTROL LOOPS IN BOILER 9 Hrs. Combustion Control -air/fuel ratio control - furnace draft control - drum level control- main stream and reheat

steam temp control - super heater control - attemperator - de-aerator control - distributed control system in power plants - interlocks in boiler operation- Problems associated with control of multiple pulverizers - Fan drives and control

UNIT 4 ANALYZERS IN POWER PLANTS 9 Hrs. Coal analyzer- thermo-gravimetri - gross calorific value - total sulphur analysis - ash analyzer - online monitor -

air quality monitoring - Sampling of ambient air - general air sampling system - Flue gas oxygen analyzer - analysis of impurities in feed water and steam - dissolved oxygen analyzer - chromatography - pH Meter - pollution monitoring instruments

UNIT 5 NUCLEAR POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION 9 Hrs. Introduction - Energy from nuclear reaction - Nuclear fission and fusion - Neutron flux and reaction rate - Types of

reactor - pressurized water reactor - boiling water reactor - Nuclear waste disposal - Piping and instrumentation diagram of different types of nuclear power plant - Nuclear reactor control loops - reactor dynamics - excess reactivity - pulse channel and logarithmic instrumentation - control and safety instrumentation - reliability aspects

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Gill A.B, “Power Plant Performance”, 6th Edition, Butterworth, London, 1984

Liptak. B.G, Analytical Instrumentation, Vol 1 & Vol 2, Chilton Book Company, 1994

Nag P.K ‘Power Plant Engineering’, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001

Sam Dukelow. G “The control of Boilers”, 2nd Edition, Instrument society of America, 1991

Elonka S.M, Kohan A.L, “Standard Boilers Operations”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1994

Wakil. E.A Power Plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984,

David Lindsley, “Boiler Control Systems”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1991

Jain. R.K, “Mechanical and industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1995

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 99: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 113 REGULATIONS 2015

SIC1611 FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHATRONICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE, E&C and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To create a strong base on the various sensors and transducers in mechanical system, interdisciplinary applications of Electronics, Electrical, Mechanical and Computer Systems for the Control of Mechanical and Electronic Systems

x To design control system for computer application like CNC.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Mechatronics: Definition & Key Issues - Evolution - Elements - Mechatronics Approach to Modern Engineering, Industrial design and safety Design.

UNIT 2 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9 Hrs.

Introduction and background, difference between transducer and sensor, transducers types, transduction principle, photoelectric transducers- thermistors, thermodevices, thermocouple, inductive transducers capacitive transducers, piezoelectric transducers, piezoelectric transducers. Hall Effect transducers, Fiber optic transducers, Signal Processing - Data Display.

UNIT 3 ACTUATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Introduction to Mechanical Types and Electrical Types - Pneumatic & Hydraulic Systems - Applications - Selection of Actuators, Kinematics of robot manipulator links.

UNIT 4 DIGITAL AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9 Hrs.

Digital logic neuron system, Types of Controllers - Programmable Logic Controllers - applications - ladder diagrams - Microprocessor Applications in Mechatronics: Temperature measurement system, Domestic washing machine - Programming Interfacing - Computer Applications: CNC drilling machine

UNIT 5 RECENT ADVANCES 9 Hrs. Manufacturing Mechatronics - Automobile Mechatronics - Medical Mechatronics - Office Automation - Case Studies

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Bolton. W “Mechatronics: Electronic Control System for Mechanical & Electrical Engineering”, 2nd Edition Pearson Education, 2004.

2. Ramachandran. K.P,Vijaya Raghavan. G.K, Mechatronics, A.R.S. Publications, Second Edition, 2008.

3. Bradly.D.A, Dawson.D, Burd. N.C, Loader. A.J “Mechatronics: Electronics in Products and Processes” Nelson Publisher, 2004.

4. Michael B. Histand & David G. Alciators, “Introduction to Mechatronics & Measurement systems”, McGraw- Hill International Editions, 1998

5. Dan Necsulescu, “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 2005.Bishop, Robert H, "Mechatronics Hand book", CRC Press, 2002.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 100: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 114 REGULATIONS 2015

SPR1307 RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C Total. Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To develop in a student efficient and effective deployment of an organization's resources when they are needed.

Such resources may include financial resources, inventory, human skills, production resources, or information technology.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION AND LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs. Operations Research(OR)- Nature – Characteristics – Phases - Role of OR in Decision making - Outline of OR

Models Linear Programming – Formulation of L.P.problems –Solution by graphical method, simplex method, Two Phase Method, Big M methods, Dual Simplex method

UNIT 2 TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT MODEL 9 Hrs.

Transportation problem – Initial Basic feasible solution- Northwest corner method, Least Cost method, Vogel’s approximation method – Test for optimality-MODI method. Assignment problems- Hungarian assignment models-Travelling salesman problems

UNIT 3 RESOURCE SCHEDULING AND NETWORK ANALYSIS 9 Hrs.

Problem of Sequencing – Problem with N jobs and 2 machines N Jobs 3 machines N Jobs and m machines and 2 Jobs m machines (Graphical method). Project Management -Basic concepts–Network construction and scheduling Critical Path Method (CPM) & Program Evaluation Review Technique (PERT) and resource leveling by network techniques, time – Cost trade off.

UNIT 4 INVENTORY CONTROL 9 Hrs.

Inventory Control – Various Types of inventory models – deterministic inventory models – Production model, Purchase model– with and without shortage- Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) – Buffer stock – Shortage quantity, Probabilistic inventory models – Quantity Discount and Price Breaks

UNIT 5 QUEUEING THEORY AND REPLACEMENT MODELS 9 Hrs.

Queuing theory – Poisson arrivals and exponential service times, Single channel models only, Replacement policy for items whose maintenance cost increases with time- Consideration of time value of money - Replacement policy- Individual, Group replacement of items that fail completely and suddenly.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1.. R.Panneerselvam, “Operation Research”, 2nd Edn., Prentice Hall, 2001.

2. S.D Sharma, “Operation research Theory, Methods and Application”, 17th Edn., Kedar Nath Ram Nath Publication, 2010.

3. Nita H Shah, Ravi M Gor & Hardik Soni, “Operation Research”, 4th Edn., PHI, 2010.

4. Hamdy A.Taha, “Operation Research”, 8th Edn, PHI, 2008

5. Hiller & Liberman., “Introduction to Operations Research”, 5th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2001

6. Ravindran,Phillips &Solberg, “Operations Research: Principles and practice”, 2nd Edn., Wiley India Lts, 2007

7. Ronald L. Rardin, “Optimization in Operations Research”, Prentice Hall, 1998

END SEMESTER EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. Part A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

Part B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice; each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 101: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 115 REGULATIONS 2015

SBI1101 INTRODUCTION TO BIOINFORMATICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To enable the students to understand about tools used in Bioinformatics & how to use them. This will facilitate the students to undertake projects in the modern biology.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

Introduction to bioinformatics, biological information, the Central Dogma, Bioinformatics: Definition and overview Bioinformatics, Branches of Bioinformatics, Aim, Scope and Research areas of Bioinformatics. Genome projects, human genome project- Databases and human chromosomes, role of Bioinformatics in biological sequences. Biological data- DNA sequence protein sequence, macromolecular structure. Challenges in bioinformatics.

UNIT 2 COMPUTING IN BIOINFORMATICS 9 Hrs. Introduction to internet-facilities used on the internet-www- web browsers, introduction to network basics-LAN,

wan, network topology, protocol. Basic principles of computing in bioinformatics - databases system, programming languages for bioinformatics- Perl, python. Introduction to computational biology.

UNIT 3 BIOLOGICAL DATABASES 9 Hrs. Databases and programs, Information retrieval from databases of nucleic acid and proteins. Pair wise alignment

and database searching, Multiple Sequence Alignment database searching, DNA analysis, protein analysis, Data information and Knowledge Management, Concepts in Bioinformatics, Databases and Data Warehouses in Bioinformatics. Challenges, combining multiple types of data, Information Retrieval system in bioinformatics

UNIT 4 TOOLS APPLICATIONS IN BIOINFORMATIC 9 Hrs.

Bio-algorithms and Tools- Identifying genes, Overview of sequence annotation. Gene prediction methods-Human variation and disease identification, Visualizing and comparing nucleic acids and Protein Introduction to Phylogenetic analysis definition, concepts of tree, steps in constructing Phylogenetic analysis. Introduction to microarray.

UNIT 5 SOFTWARES IN BIOINFORMATICS 9 Hrs. Basic software tools used in bioinformatics - Sequence analysis- GCG, Emboss - Cn3D viewer- Rasmol, Swiss pdb viewer, Pymol, Jmol. Modeling- Discovery studio 2.0, Docking -Auto dock,HEX.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Des Higgins and Willie Taylor, “Bioinformatics sequence structures and databases”, Oxford University press, 1st ed., 2000.

2. Atwood, Paey Smith, “Introduction to bioinformatics”, 2001.

3. Arthur M.Lesk, “Introduction to bioinformatics”, 2002.

4. David W. Mount, “Bioinformatics: Sequences and genome analyses”, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory press, 2000.

5. Westhead, Parish and Twyman, “Instant notes: Bioinformatics”, 2003.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 102: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 116 REGULATIONS 2015

SBI1605 PYTHON L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To learn to appreciate the programming language that can be used for a wide variety of programming tasks and

to expose the student to the standard scripting language. At the end of the course, the student will be developing adequate skills in programming and will be known to understand the implementation of various applications using powerful assortment of built-in types in python.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PYTHON 9 Hrs. Introduction to PYTHON- History -Features –installation - Setting up path -Working with Python -Basic Syntax - -Operator

UNIT 2 VARIABLE AND DATA TYPES 9 Hrs. Native datatypes – Booleans –Numbers – Strings - Bytes and byte arrays-Lists- Tuples – Sets - Dictionaries

UNIT 3 REGULAR EXPRESSIONS 9 Hrs. Python regular expressions – Match function -Search function -Matching VS Searching -Modifiers -Patterns.

UNIT 4 CONTROL STATEMENTS 9 Hrs. Conditional Statements -If , If- else , Nested if-else , - Looping- For , While , Nested loops,- Control Statements- Break , Continue , Pass

UNIT 5 FUNCTIONS AND MODULES 9 Hrs. Functions - Defining a function -Calling a function -Types of functions -Function Arguments -Anonymous

functions -Global and local variables, Modules- Importing module -Math module -Random module -Packages – Composition

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Hetland., “Beginning Python” , Apress, 2008

2. Mark Pilgrim, “Dive Into Python”, Apress, 2004

3. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference (English)” , McGraw-Hill/Osborne Media, 2001.

4. Mark Summerfield , “Programming in Python 3”, 2nd ed (PIP3) , Addison Wesley ISBN: 0-321-68056-1

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 103: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 117 REGULATIONS 2015

SBM1304 BIOMATERIALS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x The course provides an intriguing insight in chemistry, engineering, biology and medicine that has a significant impact on biomaterials.

x It highlights the way in which modern biology and medicine is inextricably linked to scientific discipline and helping us to understand the complex world of biomaterials.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION AND METALS 9 Hrs. Biomaterials – Overview, Classification of biomaterials, Interfacial Phenomena and tissue response to

biomaterials, Metals and alloys for orthopedic implants-Stainless steel, Cobalt chromium alloy, Titanium and its alloys, Precious metal alloys, Other metal alloys. Dental implants – materials, types and designs

UNIT 2 REPLACEMENT AND FIXATION DEVICES 9 Hrs. Bioelectric effect, Wolff’s Law, Types of orthopedic fixation devices-pins, screws and plates, Intra Medullary and

spinal nails. Interface Problems with artificial joints and various fixation methods, Hard tissue replacements – total hip and knee joint replacements. Soft Tissue replacements- Sutures -Tapes, Staples, Adhesives. Maxillofacial Implants

UNIT 3 POLYMERS AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Polymers in biomedical use, Hydrogels, silicone rubber, biodegradable polymers, Polymer Sterilization, Deterioration of polymers

UNIT 4 BIOCERAMICS AND COMPOSITES 9 Hrs.

Bioceramics, types and – bioactive resorbable, non – resorbable, bioceramic coatings on metallic and implants and bone bonding reactions on implantation. Hydroxyapatite – properties and applications. Composites – Types and Applications, Bioglass

UNIT 5 OPTHALMOLOGY, CORROSION AND TESTS 9 Hrs.

Ophthalmology- Introduction, Contact lenses, Eye shields, Viscoelastic solutions, Vitreous implants, Acrylate adhesives, Scleral buclikng materials for retinal detachment, artificial tears. Corrosion, Biocompatibility and Hemocompatibility, Biological Tests. Material surface characterization

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Sujata V Bhat, “Biomaterials”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.

2. Rolando Barbucci, “Integrated Biomaterials Science”, Plenum Publishers, New York, 2002.

3. A.F. Von Recum, “Handbook of Biomaterials Evaluation – Scientific, Technical and Clinical Testing of Implant Materials”, 2nd Edition, Taylor & Francis, Philadelphia,1999.

4. J.B Park and R.S Lakes, “Biomaterials: An Introduction”, Second Edition, Plenum press, New York, 1992.

5. Joseph D Bronzino, “The Biomedical Engineering Hand Book”, Vol – 11, CRC press, 2000.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 104: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 118 REGULATIONS 2015

SBM1404 HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x The paper provides opportunities for training and research in all aspects of hospital / health administration. It helps promotes scientific management of hospital and advancement of health care systems so as to make it rational, responsive and cost efficient.

x The student is thus educated in the development of high quality of hospital care in the community and the country so as to provide a satisfactory environment to the patient and clinical research

UNIT 1 STANDARD OF HOSPITAL 9 Hrs. Concept of Hospital Management – Role of Administrator – Responsibilities of Administrator – Hospital Design – Outlines for establishing Departmental Zones – Hospital Engineering

UNIT 2 HOSPITAL ORGANIZATION 9 Hrs.

Organization of Out-Patient Services – Problems encountered in functioning of O.P Department – Organization of In- Patient Services – Casualty & Emergency Services - Organization and management of Operation theatres

UNIT 3 SERVICES IN HOSPITAL 9 Hrs. Organization of Ancillary Services: Lab Services – Department of Physiotherapy & Occupational Therapy – Organization of Blood Transfusion Services – Department of Radio – diagnosis – Hospital Pharmacy

UNIT 4 STERILIZATION AND HOSPITAL SAFETY 9 Hrs. Disease transmission, Sterilization and disinfection methods, Hospital safety – Radiation Safety, hazardous safety, safety disposal of biological waste - Maintenance of Equipments& Instruments.

UNIT 5 SUPPORTIVE SERVICES IN HOSPITAL 9 Hrs.

Organization and management of Nursing services and Dietary Services in hospital – House-keeping and maintenance –Medical Records -Staffing the hospital - Human resources management in hospital - Management Assisted by Computers: Reservation, Admission, Registration & Discharge Module

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Dr. L.L. Rao, “Hospital Management.”

2. R. D. Lele, “Computers in Medicine”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008

3. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 105: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 119 REGULATIONS 2015

SBM1606 BIOMEMS AND NANOTECHNOLOGY L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To enable the student to acquire adequate knowledge on micro mechanical devices and their applications in drug delivery and nanotechnology.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. MEMS – definition. Origin of MEMS – Types – Materials used and their properties. MEMS Technology. Applications in health care. Integrated MEMS and microsystem.

UNIT 2 PROCESSING: MICRO MACHINING TECHNOLOGY 9 Hrs. Lithography- etching- Ion implantation- wafer bonding- Integrated processing- Bulk micro machining- surface micro machining- coating technology and CVD-LIGA process.

UNIT 3 MICROSYSTEMS AND MICROFLUIDS 9 Hrs.

General principles- Microsensors – Actuators- Electrostatic forces- Piezoelectric crystals – Intelligent materials and structures. Fundamentals of micro fluids, lab – on – a chip devices - Silicon and glass micromachining for micro total analysis systems.Surface chemistry in polymer microfluidic systems.

UNIT 4 APPLICATION IN MEDICINE 9 Hrs. Trends in MEMS for health care. Drug delivery systems - Biochip – Micro needles- Microelectrodes- Neural prosthesis – shape memory implants.

UNIT 5 BIOMEDICAL NANOTECHNOLOGY 9 Hrs. Nanotechnology- Medical applications of Nanotechnology- Drug synthesis and delivery- Nanofabrication methods – Nanomaterials in human body- Toxicity in nanomaterials.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Microsystem- Design and manufacture”, Mc. Graw Hill

2. Malsch, NeelinaH., ed., “Biomedical Nanotechnology”, Washington, DC: CRC Press, 2005

3. Marc J. Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication and Nanotechnology”, 3rd Edition, Three-Volume Set,CRC Press

4. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, “The MEMS Handbook”, CRC Press, 2005

5. L.Yahia (Editor), L'HocineYahia, “Shape Memory Implants.”

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 106: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 120 REGULATIONS 2015

SBI1207 PERL PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To understand the basics of Perl programming and its role and applications in Bioinformatics discipline.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PERL PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Perl for Bioinformatics- Comprehensive PERL Archive Network-Variables in Perl: Scalars, Arrays and Hashes. Basic structure of Perl language- a functional approach – constructing atgc.pl. tr/// function –text formatting – formatting numerical output with printf – trapping errors at run time – the s/// operator – the chop and chomp operators.

UNIT 2 INTRODUCTION TO ARRAYS AND HASHES 9 Hrs.

Introduction to arrays and Hashes Variables – Printing hash data, accessing and removing elements. Special variable $[ Accessing elements in an array. Function list – reverse- sort- join- split- pop- push- shift- unshift-split function–advanced array operation – copying and creating arrays – populating arrays with sequential data – qw function – determination of the size of an array –counting arrays – accessing first element in an array, accessing last element in an array, accessing other elements in an array – adding elements to the end of an array – adding elements– removing elements – appending elements ,altering elements – array slices – splicing array – sorting arrays – reversing arrays – arrays from strings. Merging arrays, Transforming strings to arrays, transforming arrays to strings (Split and join functions).

UNIT 3 PERL REGULAR EXPRESSIONS AND CONTROL STRUCTURES. 9 Hrs.

Perl regular expressions – special characters (+, *,?, [ ]) – regex operator – pattern modifier operator – conditional matching operator – range operator – match quantifiers – matching boundaries, grouping matching. Perl control statements – control structures – if statements – if-else – if-elsif – if-elsif-else – while loop – until loop –unless for loop – foreach loop –scoping of variables.

UNIT 4 FILES AND DIRECTORY MANIPULATIONS 9 Hrs. Files- Operating modes: read, write, append function- File variable, Die function– terminating a program,

Reading complete file, Reading a file line by line, Closing a file. File test operators (d, e, l, r, s, w, x, B, T)-Manipulation Functions –link, unlink, rename, truncate, removing files. Directory Manipulation functions – mkdir, chdir, opendir, readdir, closedir, rmdir, chmod.

UNIT 5 INTRODUCTION TO PERL MODULES 9 Hrs. Introduction to modules and Subroutines- BioPerl module, Getopt: Long module and LWP: Simple Module-Cwd

module – creating perl module tree, system function –Perl subroutines and functions. Introduction and applications of Common Gateway Interfaces (CGI).

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Harshawardhan P Bal, “Perl Programming for Bioinformatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2003.

2. Tim Bunce and Alligator Descartes, “Programming the Perl DBI”, O'Reilly Media, USA, 2000.

3. Michael Moorhouse and Paul Berry, “Bioinformatics, Biocomputing and PERL”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK, 2004.

4. James Tisdall, “Beginning Perl for Bioinformatics”, O’Reilly & Associates, USA, 2001.

5. Steven Holzner,” PERL- Black Book”, Dreamtech Publications, 2nd Edition, 2001.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 107: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 121 REGULATIONS 2015

SBT1610 GMP AND QUALITY CONCEPTS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To introduce students about Good manufacturing practices quality concepts which would expose them to industrial scenario.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

Basic Concepts: Quality concepts, Quality Control, Quality Assurance, Good Manufacturing Practices, Good Laboratory Practices, Responsibilities. Quality Control: Quality control laboratory: Responsibilities, good laboratory practices, routine controls, instruments, protocols.

UNIT 2 GMP 9 Hrs.

Good Manufacturing Practice. Legal requirements pertaining to GMP: GMP Guidelines, Standards, Regulatory agencies c) Basic Components of GMP: Organization & Personnel, Premises, Equipments, Raw Materials, Complaints and recalls, Specifications, Self inspection.

UNIT 3 GLP 9 Hrs. Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) – an overview and basic information, Scope. Principles of GLP: Test Facility

Organization and Personnel, Quality Assurance Programme, Facilities, Test Systems, Test and Reference Items, Standard Operating Procedures, Performance of the Study, Reporting of Study Result, Storage and Retention of Records and Materials.

UNIT 4 INSPECTION 9 Hrs.

Inspections, Quality Audit and Quality System Reviews: Inspections, role of quality audit, role of inspectors, methods of inspection- routine, concise, follow-up and special inspections, frequency and duration of inspections, preparations for inspections, conduct, report and regulatory actions.

UNIT 5 REGULATION 9 Hrs. Regulatory bodies – Need and role of regulatory bodies. Different regulatory bodies – FDA, HACCP and their scope. Importance of regulatory approval. ISO 9000 – regulations.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Sidney H. Willig, “Good manufacturing Practices for Pharmaceuticals, 5th Edition, Revised and Expanded”, Marcel Dekker, Inc. New York, 2005.

2. Jose Rodriguez-Perez, “The FDA and Worldwide Current Good Manufacturing Practices and Quality System requirements guidebook for finished pharmaceuticals”, American Society for Quality, ASQ Quality Press, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, 2014.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 108: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 122 REGULATIONS 2015

SBT1611 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To understand the essentials of basic biological principles

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO CELLS 9 Hrs.

Cell-Functional unit of live organisms - Cell theory - Prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell - plant, animal, bacterial cell - cell components - functions- cell organization – tissues - basic types -cell division: Mitosis, meiosis, cell cycle regulation

UNIT 2 SOCIAL IMPORTANCE 9 Hrs. Application of biological sciences and biotechnology to the society - human health care and medicines - pharmaceuticals and nutraceuticals -food and agriculture- pollution management and environment - Biofuels

UNIT 3 INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9 Hrs. Biomolecules - classification, salient features - biological significance - carbohydrates, proteins and amino acids - lipids and fats - nucleic acids - vitamins-Enzymes

UNIT 4 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 9 Hrs.

Human Physiology - Different systems associated with human- Tissues, organ and physiology of the various systems: Digestive, respiratory, circulatory, skeletal, nervous, excretory and reproductive system - Artificial memory and neural net work

UNIT 5 MEDICAL IMPORTANCE 9 Hrs.

Infectious and non infectious diseases- causative agents, epidemiology, pathogenicity, control and prevention, treatment of AIDS, tuberculosis, Pathology of non infectious and genetic diseases and disorders - cancer, diabetes melites, cardiac diseases- neurological disorders-Parkinson’s disease

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Satyanarayana, U. “Biotechnology”, 4th Edition, Books and Allied Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata, 2007.

2. Lehninger A.L, Nelson D.L, Cox .M.M, “Principles of Biochemistry”,. CBS Publications 1993

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 109: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 123 REGULATIONS 2015

SCH1616 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To provide a basic understanding of the EIA process as it is used for research, planning, project or program evaluation, monitoring, and regulatory enforcement and to introduce students to the legal, economic, administrative and technical process of preparing and/or evaluating environmental impact documents.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

Historical development of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). EIA in Project Cycle. Legal and Regulatory aspects in India. Types and Limitations of EIA, Cross sectoral issues and terms of reference in EIA – Public Participation in EIA. EIA process.

UNIT 2 METHODS FOR EIA Methods of EIA – Check lists – Matrices – Networks – Cost-benefit analysis – Analysis of alternatives.

UNIT 3 PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9 Hrs. Assessment of Impact on land, water, air, social & cultural activities and on flora & fauna- Mathematical models- Public participation – Rapid EIA.

UNIT 4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9 Hrs.

Environmental Management Plan – Preparation, Implementation and review – Mitigation and Rehabilitation Plans– Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes – Post project audit – Ethical and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment.

UNIT 5 LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT & EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 9 Hrs.

Life Cycle Assessment - Elements of LCA - Life Cycle Costing – Eco Labeling – Designs for the Environment - International Environmental Standards - ISO 14001 - Environmental Audit. Executive summary - Documentation of EIA findings, Planning, Organization of information and Visual display material, Report preparation.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Canter, L.W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill, New York. 1996

2. Y.Anjaneyulu: “Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies”, BS Pub. 2002.

3. S.K.Shukla and Srivastava P.R., “Concepts in Environmental Impact Analysis”, Common Wealth Publishers, New Delhi, 1992.

4. John G. Rau and David C Hooten (Ed), “Environmental Impact Analysis Handbook”,McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1990.

5. Lawrence, D.P., “Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical solutions to recurrent problems”, Wiley-Interscience, New Jersey, 2003.

6. “Environmental Assessment Source book”, Vol. I, II & III. The World Bank,Washington, D.C., 1991.

8. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment”, Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Science, 1999

9. World Bank –Source book on EIA

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 110: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 124 REGULATIONS 2015

SCI1619 DISASTER MANAGEMENT L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To create an awareness towards natural and man-made disasters, disaster preparedness and disaster

management

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 12 Hrs. Natural resources and its importance - understanding on fragile eco-system - characteristics and types of

Disasters, Geological and Mountain Area Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanic eruption, landslides - Wind and Water Related Natural Disaster: Floods, Droughts, Cyclones, Tsunamis - Man Made Disasters: Forest fires, Nuclear, Biological and Chemical disaster - Causes and effects - Disaster Profile of India - Disaster Management cycle.

UNIT 2 DISASTER PREPAREDNESS 8 Hrs. Disaster management, mitigation and preparedness: Disaster Preparedness for People and Infrastructure,

CommUNITy based Disaster Preparedness Plan - Roles & Responsibilities of Different Agencies and Government: Education, Communication & Training, Central, State, District and local administration, Armed Forces, Police, Para Military Forces, International Agencies, and NGO’s - Disaster Mitigation: Strategies, Emerging Trends, Mitigation management and Role of Team and Coordination.

UNIT 3 REHABILITATION, RECONSTRUCTION & RECOVERY 10 Hrs. Damage assessment – Development of Physical and Economic Infrastructure - Nature of Damage to Houses

and Infrastructure due to Disasters - Funding Arrangements for Reconstruction - Monitoring and Evaluation of Rehabilitation Work: Training, Rescue and planning the rescue activities and rehabilitations - Role of Government and NGO’s - Participative Rehabilitation Process: Case Studies

UNIT 4 DISASTER RESPONSE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT 8 Hrs. Disaster Response Plan: Communication, Participation and Activation of Emergency Preparedness Plans,

Search, Rescue, Evacuation and other logistic management - Human Behaviour and Response Management: Psychological Response and Psychological Rehabilitation, Trauma and Stress Management, rumour and Panic Management, Medical and Health Response to Different Disasters - Relief Measures: Minimum Standard of Relief, essential components of Relief Management, and funding.

UNIT 5 RISK ASSESSMENT AND VULNERABILITY ANALYSIS 7 Hrs. Hazard, Risk and Vulnerability: Concept and Relationship: Disaster Risk Reduction, People Participation in Risk

Assessment - Vulnerability Analysis, Vulnerability Identification - Vulnerability profile of India - Strategies for Survival - Social Infrastructure for Vulnerability Reduction.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Bryant Edwards, “Natural Hazards”, Cambridge University Press, U.K, 2005 2. Carter, W. Nick, “Disaster Management, Asian Development Bank”, Manila, 1991. 3. Government of India, “Vulnerability Atlas of India”, New Delhi, 1997. 4. Sahni, Pardeep et.al. (eds.), “Disaster Mitigation Experiences and Reflections”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002 5. Sahni, Pardeep and Ariyabandu, Madhavi Malalgoda, 2012: “Disaster risk reduction in South Asia”, Phi learning pvt.

Ltd.-publisher, New Delhi, 2012. 6. Sharma, R.K. & Sharma, G.,(ed), “Natural Disaster”, APH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, 2005. 7. Taori, K, “Disaster Management through Panchayati Raj”, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2005. Websites 8. NOAA Coastal Services Center, “Linking People Information and Technology”, 9. “Risk and Vulnerability Assessment Tool”, at, http://www.csc.noaa.gov/rvat/criticalEdd.html

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 111: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 125 REGULATIONS 2015

SCS1302 COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To gain knowledge to develop, design and implement two and three dimensional graphical structures x

To enable students to acquire knowledge of Multimedia compression and animations. x To learn creation, Management and Transmission of Multimedia objects.

UNIT 1 BASICS OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9 Hrs. Output Primitives: Survey of computer graphics – Overview of graphics systems – Line drawing algorithm – Circle drawing algorithm – Curve drawing algorithm - Attributes of output primitives – Anti-aliasing.

UNIT 2 2D TRANSFORMATIONS AND VIEWING 8 Hrs. Basic two dimensional transformations – Other transformations – 2D and 3D viewing – Line clipping – Polygon clipping – Logical classification – Input functions – Interactive picture construction techniques.

UNIT 3 3D CONCEPTS AND CURVES 10 Hrs. 3D object representation methods - B-REP , sweep representations, Three dimensional transformations. Curve generation -

cubic splines, Beziers, blending of curves- other interpolation techniques, Displaying Curves and Surfaces, Shape description requirement, parametric function. Three dimensional concepts.Introduction- Fractals and self similarity- Successive refinement of curves, Koch curve and peano curves.

UNIT 4 METHODS AND MODELS 8 Hrs. Visible surface detection methods – Illumination models – Halftone patterns – Dithering techniques – Polygon rendering methods – Ray tracing methods – Color models and color applications.

UNIT 5 MULTIMEDIA BASICS AND TOOLS 10 Hrs.

Introduction to multimedia - Compression & Decompression – Data & File Format standards – Digital voice and audio – Video image and animation. Introduction to Photoshop – Workplace – Tools – Navigating window – Importing and exporting images – Operations on Images – resize, crop, and rotate. Introduction to Flash – Elements of flash document – Drawing tools – Flash animations – Importing and exporting - Adding sounds – Publishing flash movies – Basic action scripts – GoTo, Play, Stop, Tell Target

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Donald Hearn, Pauline Baker M., "Computer Graphics”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1994.

2. Tay Vaughan ,”Multimedia”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.

3. Ze-Nian Li, Mark S. Drew ,”Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Prentice Hall of India, 2004.

4. D. McClelland, L.U.Fuller ,”Photoshop CS2 Bible”, Wiley Publishing, 2005.

5. James D. Foley, Andries van Dam, Steven K Feiner, John F. Hughes, “Computer Graphics Principles and Practice, 2nd Edition in C, Audison Wesley, ISBN – 981-235-974-5

6. William M. Newman, Roberet F. Sproull, “Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition.

END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No Choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 112: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 126 REGULATIONS 2015

SCY1601 SPECTROSCOPY L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To make the students to understand the basic concepts about the analytical techniques

UNIT 1 UV-VIS SPECTROSCOPY 9 Hrs.

Principles of radiation – Frank condon principle – Various electronic transitions (185-800 nm) – Beer-Lambert law – Instrumentation of single beam and double beam spectrophotometer – Woodward and Fieser rule – Applications of UV-Visible spectroscopy.

UNIT 2 IR AND RAMAN SPECTROSCOPY 9 Hrs.

Principles of IR spectra – Instrumentation of IR spectroscopy – Force constant – Effect of hydrogen bonding – Applications of IR spectroscopy – Raman spectroscopy: Principle – Strokes line and antistrokes line – Instrumentation – Applications of Raman spectroscopy.

UNIT 3 1H NMR AND 1 3C SPECTROSCOPY 9 Hrs. General introduction and definition: Chemical shift – Spin-spin interaction – Shielding mechanism – Coupling constants. Nuclear overhauser effect (NOE). Instrumentation of 1H NMR and 13C spectroscopy.

UNIT 4 MASS SPECTROMETRY 9 Hrs. Principle of Mass spectra – Instrumentation – Principle of fragmentation – Nitrogen rule – McLafferty rearrangement – Representation of Mass spectrum – Applications of mass spectra.

UNIT 5 IMAGING TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. Scanning electron microscopy – Energy dispesrve X-ray spectroscopy – Transmission electron microscopy – Atomic force microscopy – Scanning tunneling microscopy – X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Banwell C.N., and McCash E. M., “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000.

2. Silverstein R. M., and Webster F. X., “Spectroscopic Identification of Organic Compounds”, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.

3. Levine I. N., “Molecular Spectroscopy”, John Wiley & Sons, 1974.

4. Williams D. H., and Fleming I., “Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemistry”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, 1988.

5. Kemp W., “Applications of Spectroscopy”, English Language Book Society, 1987.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (10% problems may be asked)

Page 113: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 127 REGULATIONS 2015

SCY1602 ENERGY SOURCES L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To know the various sources of energy available and to face the future challenges arising due to energy crisis.

UNIT 1 GLOBAL AND INDIAN ENERGY SCENARIO 9 Hrs. Bio-fuels - Nuclear energy - Their utilization pattern in the past, present and future projections of consumption pattern. Power sector reforms - Restructuring of energy supply sector - Energy strategy for future.

UNIT 2 HYDROGEN ENERGY 9 Hrs.

Hydrogen as a renewable energy source: Sources of Hydrogen – Fuel for Vehicles. Hydrogen Production: Direct electrolysis of water – Thermal decomposition of water – Biochemical methods of hydrogen production. Storage of Hydrogen: Gaseous, Cryogenic and Metal hydride.

UNIT 3 ELECROCHEMICAL ENERGY 9 Hrs. Fuel cells: Principle of working, construction and applications of phosphoric acid fuel cell – Solid oxide fuel cell –

Molten carbonate fuel cell – Polymer electrolyte membrane fuel cell. Batteries: Lead-acid battery – Nickel-cadmium battery – Lithium batteries – Nickel hydride batteries.

UNIT 4 BIOENERGY 9 Hrs.

Thermo-chemical Conversion: Pyrolysis – Combustion – Gasification – Liquification. Bio-Chemical Conversion: Aerobic and Anaerobic conversion – Fermentation. Ethanol as a fuel for I.C. engines. Isolation of methane from Biogas and packing and its utilization.

UNIT 5 NUCLEAR ENERGY 9 Hrs. Nuclear Energy – Nuclear Chain reaction – Fuel enrichment – Different Types of Nuclear Reactors: Pressurised water reactor – Boiling water reactor – Fast Breeder reactor. Nuclear waste disposal – Nuclear Fusion.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Culp A. W., “Principles of Energy Conversion”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1991.

2. Maths D. A., “Hydrogen Technology for Energy”, Noyes Data Corp., 1976.

3. Linden D., Handbook: “Batteries and Fuel cell”, Mc.Graw Hill, 1984.

4. Bansal N. K., and Kleeman M. K., “Renewable Sources of Energy and Conversion Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990.

5. White L. P., “Biomass as Fuel”, Academic Press, 1981.

6. Raymond Murray, Keith Holbert, “Nuclear Energy: An Introduction to the Concepts, Systems, and Applications of Nuclear. Processes”, 7th Edition, Elsevier Science & Technology, 2014.

7. Arniker H. J., “Essentials of Nuclear Chemistry”, New Age Publications, 1996.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (10% problems may be asked)

Page 114: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 128 REGULATIONS 2015

SHS1601 LIFE AND EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x The course aims at equipping students to be competent in facing the challenges in today's globalized context,

by providing an insight to soft skills for success and life skills for survival at the workplace.

UNIT 1 ACHIEVEMENT MOTIVATION 9 Hrs. Time Management - Positive and negative aspects of time log - Formula for successful time management.

UNIT 2 SELF-AWARENESS AND EMPATHY 9 Hrs. Work-Life Balance – Project completion Techniques – Effective Planning and Organisation - Strategies to improve team communication.

UNIT 3 DECISION MAKING Decision making techniques- types of decisions- Setting Goals and Plans - Problem Solving Techniques.

UNIT 4 EFFECTIVE COMMNICATION 9 Hrs. Non-verbal communication - means of communication – Personality development – Language and body language for interviews- Self Empowerment.

UNIT 5 NEGOTIATION SKILLS 9 Hrs. Negotiation skills – skill acquisition strategies – effective persuading skills.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Gravells, Ann. “Delivering Employability Skills in the Lifelong Learning Sector Further Education and Skills”, United Kingdom: SAGE Publications Ltd, 2010.

2. Hind, David W.G., Stuart Moss, “Employability Skills,” Business Education Publishers Ltd., United Kingdom :Tyne & Wear, 2005.

3. Rao M.S., “Enhancing Employability: Connecting Campus with Corporate”, New Delhi: I K International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2010

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 115: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 129 REGULATIONS 2015

SHS1602 TECHNICAL WRITING FOR SCIENTISTS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To provide with an introduction to professional writing as a disciplinary field.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO TECHNICAL WRITING 9 Hrs. Technical Writing – Principles and procedure of technical writing; Role of a Technical writer, Various forms of Technical Writing

UNIT 2 ONLINE TOOLS 9 Hrs. Printed documentation and Online Help Systems, Working with images and illustrations, designing graphic aids.

UNIT 3 PROCESS OF WRITING 9 Hrs. Collecting and Organizing information, Drafting information verbally and visually, Producing Information, Documentation Process.

UNIT 4 REACHING THE AUDIENCE 9 Hrs. Technical Writing Process Templates and Page design, Audience Profiling.

UNIT 5 PRESENTATION 9 Hrs. Writing specialized forms as abstracts, instructions, proposals and project and lab reports

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Mike Markel's “Technical Communication”, New York: Bedford/St. Martin's, 2009

2. Joseph M. Williams book Style: “Toward Clarity and Grace”, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1995

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN: Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 116: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 130 REGULATIONS 2015

SHS1603 PROFESSIONAL WRITING AND L T P Credits Total Marks

ADVANCED RHETORIC 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To educate the learners on written communication and provide exposure to practical aspects of writing for wider audience and for scientific community.

UNIT 1 BASICS OF PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Technical Writing and Business communication (process, networks, importance, cultural variations, today’s globalized workplaces), Practical aspects of communication, Principles and procedure of technical writing, Role of a Technical writer , attention to analyzing audience and purpose, Understanding and Inventing Pedagogies for Professional Writing.

UNIT 2 PROCESS OF PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. Technical Writing Process Today, Genres of Technical Communication, Writing Proposals, Formats for Letters, Memos, abstracts, instructions, and proposals, and Email Messages.

UNIT 3 PRACTICAL ASPECTS OFPROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Drafting and Documentation, Collecting and Organizing information , Drafting information verbally and visually, Producing Information, Documentation Process, Argument, Persuasion, Propaganda, Audience and Style, Readers and Context of Use, The participatory model of writing.

UNIT 4 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS & STRATEGIES IN CHANGING SCENARIO 9 Hrs. Ethics in Professional Communication, Applying theory to practice- analysis of papers and speeches, Writing on

line-Principles while designing web sites, Creating effective presentation slides, Speech writing- basics, scrutiny and observation, Speech writing techniques and application.

UNIT 5 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION & FUTURE 9 Hrs. Future of Technical Communication, multimedia genre, Identity, Authority, and Learning to Write in New Workplaces, Writing work, technology, and pedagogy in the present era

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Dubinsky, James, ed., “Teaching Technical Communication: Critical Issues for the Classroom”. Bedford,

2004 Hawk, Byron. "Toward a Post-Techne: or, Inventing Pedagogies for Professional Writing." (TCQ)

Mara, Andrew and Byron Hawk. "Posthuman Rhetorics and Technical Communication."

Henry, Jim. “Writing Workplace Cultures: An Archaeology of Professional Writing”. SIUP, 2000.

Johnson-Sheehan, Richard. “Technical Communication Today” 3rd ed. NY: Longman, 2010.

Locker, Kitty O. and Donna S. Kienzler., “Business and Administrative Communication”. 9th ed. McGraw Hill, 2010.

Mike Markel's Technical Communication, New York: Bedford/St. Martin's, 2009

Spilka, Rachel, ed. “Digital Literacy in/for Technical Communications”. Routledge, 2009.

Spinuzzi, Clay. “Tracing Genres through Organizations: A Sociocultural Approach to Information Design (Acting with

Technology)”. MIT, 2003

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 117: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 131 REGULATIONS 2015

SIT1402 MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To develop applications for current and emerging mobile computing devices, performing tasks at all stages of the software development life-cycle.

x To learn how to utilize rapid prototyping techniques to design and develop sophisticated mobile interfaces.

x To design, implement and deploy mobile applications using an appropriate software development environment.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION AND UI INTERFACE 9 Hrs.

Introduction to mobile technologies, mobile operation systems, Mobile devices-pros and cons, Introduction to Android, Versions, Features, Architecture, UI Widgets and Events handling, Layouts, Required tools-Eclipse, ADT, AVD, Application structure, AndroidManifest file, Android design philosophy, Creating Android applications.

UNIT 2 BUILDING BLOCKS AND DATABASES 9 Hrs. Introduction to Activities and Intents-Understanding Activity life cycle, Linking Activities, Passing Data, Toast,

Displaying a Dialog Window and Notifications. Content Provider, Services, Broadcast receivers, accessing databases, sample applications, debugging and deploying app, publish in Playstore.

UNIT 3 C PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs. C- Data Types and Expressions, Decision Making and Looping, Objects and Classes, Property, Messaging,

Categories and Extensions, Fast Enumeration – NSArray, NSDictionary, Methods and Selectors, Static & Dynamic objects, Exception handling, Memory management, Required Tools- Xcode, iOS Simulator, Instruments, ARC, frameworks.

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO IOS 9 Hrs. Introduction to iPhone, History, Versions, Features, MVC Architecture, View Controller - Building the UI and

Event handling, Application life cycle, Tab Bars, Story Boards and Navigation Controllers, Table View, Push Notification, Database handling, Debugging and Deployment, Publishing app in Appstore, sample applications.

UNIT 5 WINDOWS MOBILE APP DEVELOPMENT 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Windows Phone 8, Application Life cycle, UI Designing and events, Building, Files and Storage, Network Communication, Push Notification, Background Agents, Maps and Locations, Data Access and storage,Introduction to silvelight and XAML, Running and Debugging the App, Deploying and Publishing.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Reto Meier, “Professional Android Application Development”, Wrox Edition.

2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/android/index.htm

3. http://developer.android.com/training/index.html

4. Stephen G. Kochan, “Programming in COURSE OBJECTIVE C”, Addition Wesley, 4th Edition.

5. David Mark, Jack Nutting and Jeff LaMarche, “Beginning iOS 5 Development”, Apress Edition.

6. Baijian Yang, Pei Zheng, Lionel M. Ni, “Professional Microsoft Smartphone Programming”, Wrox Edition.

END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No Choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 118: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 132 REGULATIONS 2015

SIT1606 BIG DATA L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To understand the dominant software systems and algorithms for coping with Big Data.

x Apply appropriate analytic techniques and tools to analyze big data, create statistical models, and identify insights that can lead to actionable results

x To explore the ethical implications of big data research, and particularly as they relate to the web

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Introduction to Big Data – Challenges of Conventional Systems - Nature of Data - Small data-Medium data –

Big Data – Small data vs Big data - Sources of Big Data- Big Data Characteristics – Big Data Analytics – Importance of Big Data, Big Data in the Enterprise – Big Data Enterprise Model – Building a Big Data Platform -Big data in Social and Behavioral sciences.

UNIT 2 HDFS, HADOOP AND HADOOP INFRASTRUCTURE 9 Hrs. Hadoop and Databases - Typical Datacenter Architecture - Adding Hadoop to the Mix - Key Benefit -· Flexibility:

Complex Data Processing - HDFS - Hadoop Infrastructure -Architecture – Different in Data Model and Computing Model – HDFS Files and Blocks , Components of HDFS - Hadoop framework - HDFS-Map Reduce Framework-Data Loading techniques-Hadoop Cluster Architecture-Hadoop Configuration files-Hadoop Cluster modes-Single Node-Multi Node-Fully distributed node.

UNIT 3 HADOOP MAP REDUCE FRAMEWORK 9 Hrs. Relationship between MapReduce and HDFS- Relationship between MapReduce and HDFS- Clients, Data Nodes, and HDFS Storage - MapReduce workloads.

Hadoop framework- Hadoop data types-Hadoop map reduce Paradigm-Map and Reduce Tasks-Map reduce Execution framework-Partitioners and Combiners-Input formats (Input Splits and Records, Text Input, Binary Input, Multiple Inputs)- Output Formats (TextOutput, BinaryOutPut, Multiple Output)- Hadoop Mapreduce programming-Advanced Map reduce concepts- Counters, Custom Writables-Unit testing framework-Error Handling-Tuning-Advanced Map reduce.

UNIT 4 HADOOP IMPLEMENTATION AND HADOOP ECO SYSTEM TOOLS 9 Hrs. Hadoop Implementation - · Job Execution - · Hadoop Data Types - · Job Configurations - · Input and Output Formats ECO system tools- Pig's Data Model, Pig Latin, Developing & Testing Pig Latin Scripts- Writing Evaluation,

Filter, Load & Store Functions-Hive- Hive Architecture- Comparison with Traditional Database- HiveQL: Data Types, Operators and Functions- Hive Tables- Querying Data-Advance Hive, NoSQL Databases -HBase-Loading Data in Hbase-Querying Data in Hbase

UNIT 5 HADOOP PROJECT ENVIRONMENT 9 Hrs. HBase: Introduction to HBase, Client API's and their features, Available Client, HBase Architecture, MapReduce

Integration. HBase: Advanced Usage, Schema Design, Advance Indexing, Coprocessors, Hadoop 2.0- MRv2 –YARN-NameNode High Availability, HDFS Federation, MRv2, YARN, Running MRv1 in YARN, Upgrade your existing MRv1 code to MRv2, Programming in YARN framework-cover Apache Oozie Workflow Scheduler for Hadoop

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCES BOOKS

1. WA Gmob , “Big Data and Hadoop”, Kindle Edition, 2013

2. Eric Miller, “A Overview of Map Reduce and its impact on Distributed Data”, Kindle Edition, 2012.

3. Strata, “ Big Data Now”, O’Reily Media Inc., Kindle Edition, 2012.

END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No Choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 119: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 133 REGULATIONS 2015

SIT1608 GREEN COMPUTING L T P Credits Total Marks

3 __ 0 __ 0 ____ 3 _______ 100 __

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To study about existing green computing strategies

x Fundamental challenges in achieving green operations of computing units

x Assess enterprise-wide and personal computing and computing related energy consumption.

UNIT 1 GREEN COMPUTING FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs.

Green IT fundamentals: Business, IT, and the environment – Green computing: Carbon foot print - scoop on power – Green IT strategies: Drivers, Dimensions, and Goals – Environmentally responsible business: Policies, Practices and Metrics.

UNIT 2 GREEN ASSETS AND MODELING 9 Hrs.

Green Assets: Buildings, data centers, networks and devices – Green business process management: Modeling, optimization and collaboration – Green enterprise architecture – Environmental intelligence – Green supply chains – Green information systems: Design and development models.

UNIT 3 GRID FRAMEWORK 9 Hrs. Virtualizing of IT systems – Role of electric utilities, telecommuting, teleconferencing and teleporting – Materials recycling – Best ways for green PC – Green data center – Green grid framework

UNIT 4 GREEN COMPLIANCE 9 Hrs.

Socio-cultural aspects of green IT – Green enterprise transformation roadmap – Green Compliance: protocols, standards and audits –Emergent carbon issues: technologies and future.TheWayClimate Savers Computing Initiative Do - The Climate Savers Computing Initiative - What Green Computing Impact Organization Supplies - Green Computers Initiatives - Green Computing Impact Organization Overview - Green Electronics Council - Going Green Can Be Truly Challenging - The Green Grid Framework - The CSCI Top Secrets Revealed - The EPEAT Standards - To Have a Green Computer - Green Computing Means to Save Your Money and Your Business - Finances - Green Computing Initiative Platforms.

UNIT 5 CASE STUDIES 9 Hrs. The Environmentally Responsible Business Strategies (ERBS) – Case study scenarios for trial runs – Case studies – Applying green IT strategies and applications to a home, hospital, packaging industry and telecom sector.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Bhuvan Unhelkar, “Green IT Strategies and Applications- Using Environmental Intelligence”, CRC Press, June 2011.

2. Woody Leonhard, Katherrine Murray, “Green Home computing for dummies”, August 2009.

3. Warland & Pravin Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Jean Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., II Edition, 2001.

4. Jason Harris, “Green Computing and Green IT- Best Practices onregulations & industry”, Lulu.com, 2008.

5. Alin Gales, Michael Schaefer, Mike Ebbers, “Green Data Center:steps for the Journey”, Shoff/IBM rebook, 2011.

6. John Lamb, “The Greening of IT”, Pearson Education, 2009.

END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No Choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 120: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 134 REGULATIONS 2015

SIT1609 GAME PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES x To provide introductions to event driven programming, game engine scripting, game engine class structures.

x Learning to plan and to report on a significant programming project.

x Learn to work in programming in teams, and learn to use standard game development environments, in particular the Unity development platform.

UNIT 1 3D GRAPHICS FOR GAME PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs.

Coordinate Systems, Ray Tracing, Modelling in Game Production, Vertex Processing, Rasterization, Fragment Processing and Output Merging, Illumination and Shaders, Parametric Curves and Surfaces, Shader Models, Image Texturing, Bump Mapping, Advanced Texturing, Character Animation, Physics-based Simulation

UNIT 2 GAME DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9 Hrs. Character development, Story Telling, Narration, Game Balancing, Core mechanics, Principles of level design, Genres of Games, Collision Detection, Game Logic, Game AI, Path Finding.

UNIT 3 GAMING ENGINE DESIGN 9 Hrs. Renderers, Software Rendering, Hardware Rendering, and Controller based animation, Spatial Sorting, Level of detail, collision detection, standard objects, and physics

UNIT 4 GAMING PLATFORMS AND FRAMEWORKS 9 Hrs. Flash, DirectX, OpenGL, Java, Python, XNA with Visual Studio, Mobile Gaming for the Android, iOS, Game engines - Adventure Game Studio, DXStudio, Unity.

UNIT 5 GAME DEVELOPMENT 9 Hrs. Developing 2D and 3D interactive games using OpenGL, DirectX – Isometric and Tile Based Games, Puzzle games, Single Player games, Multi-Player games.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT REFERENCE BOOKS

1. David H. Eberly, “3D Game Engine Design, Second Edition: A Practical Approach to Real-Time Computer Graphics” Morgan Kaufman , 2 Edition, 2006.

2. Jung Hyun Han, “3D Graphics for Game Programming”, Chapman and Hal/CRC,1st edition, 2011 .

3. Mike McShaf rfy, “Game Coding Complete”, Third Edition, Charles River Media, 2009.

4. Jonathan S. Harbour, “Beginning Game Programming”, Course Technology PTR, 3 edition, 2009.

5. Ernest Adams and Andrew Rolings, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Prentice Hall 1st edition, 2006.

END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No Choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 121: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 135 REGULATIONS 2015

SPH1601 ENERGY PHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To expose the students to the basic principles of energy conversions, materials for energy conversion and

energy storage devices.

UNIT 1 ENERGY AND THERMODYNAMICS 9 Hrs. Forms of Energy, Conservation of Energy, Entropy, Heat capacity, Thermodynamic cycles: Brayton, Carnot Diesel, Otto and Rankin cycle; Fossil fuels, time scale of fossil fuels and solar energy as an option,.

UNIT 2 ENERGY CONVERSION MATERIALS 9 Hrs. Single, poly – and amorphous silicon, GaAs, CdS, Cu2S, CuInSe2, CdTe etc. technologies for fabrication of

single and polycrystalline silicon solar cells, amorphous silicon solar cells and tandem cells, solar cell modules, photovoltaic systems, space quality solar cells

UNIT 3 PHOTOVOLTAIC CON VERTORS 9 Hrs. Introduction- Photovoltaic effect-conversion of solar energy into electrical energy- behaviour of solar cells-basic

structure and characteristics of solar cells-single, multi and thin film silicon solar cells-solar cell arrays- PV modules, generators-interfacing PV modules to loads, direct connection of load to PV modules and connection of PV modules to a battery and load together-energy storage alternatives to PV systems..

UNIT 4 THERMOELECTRIC CONVERTERS 9 Hrs. Thermoelectric effects, solid state description of thermoelectric effect, Kelvin’s thermodynamic relations, analysis

of thermoelectric generators, basic assumptions, temperature distribution and thermal energy transfer for generator, co-efficient of performance for thermoelectric cooling,.

UNIT 5 ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES 9 Hrs. Cuprates and MgB2 superconductors and their properties, superconducting wires, Role of superconductor in

Electric generator, Magnetic energy storage devices and power transmission. Energy storage systems, Faradaic and non-Faradaic processes, Types of capacitors and batteries, Comparison of capacitor and battery, Charge-discharge cycles, experimental evaluation using Cyclic voltammetry, and other techniques.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Richard C. Neville, “Solar energy conversion: The solar cell”, Elsevier Science; 2 edition, 1995

2. Peter Aue, “Advances in Energy systems and technology”, Academic Press, 1978. 3. Frank Kreith and Jang Kreider, “Principles of solar engineering”, CRC Press; 2 edition, 2000.

4. A. E. Dixon & J. D. Leslie, “Solar energy conversion”, Science Direct, 1999. 5. A.Goetzberger, V.U.Hoffmann, “Photovoltaic solar energy generation”, Springer-Verlag, 2005.

6. Castaner, S.Silvestre, “Modelling Photovoltaic systems”, Pspice John Wiley & Sons, 2002. 7. R.J.Komp, Practical Photovoltaics, “Electricity from solar cells”, 3rd edition, Aatec Publ., 2001.

8. R.Messeiger, J.Ventre, “Photovoltaic systems Engg”, 2nd edition, CRC Press, 2004. 9. Stanley W Angrist, “Direct energy conversion” (4th edition) –Allyn and Bacon, Inc., 1982

10. B. E. Conway, “Electrochemical supercapacitors”, Kluwer Academic Press. Springer US, Apr 30, 1999 11. David Linden, “Handbook of Batteries and Fuel Cells”, McGraw-Hill, 1984

12. A.G. Milnes and D. L. Feucht, “Heterojunction and metal – semiconductor junctions“, Academic Press, 1972.

13. B.G. Streetman, “Solid state electronic devices”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks - 80 Marks

(10% problems may be asked)

Page 122: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 136 REGULATIONS 2015

SPH1602 GEOPHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To provide a qualitative idea on the fundamentals of seismology and theoretical understanding of various physical properties of earth.

UNIT 1 SEISMOLOGY 9 Hrs. Introduction-Seismology-P-waves-S waves, their velocities-the location of epicenters-Effect of Boundaries-Major

discontinuities-.Seismic energy sources-Detectors-Interpretation of time and distance curves.-Derivation of properties from the velocities.

UNIT 2 INTERNAL STRUCTURE OF EARTH 9 Hrs. Introduction-Seismic waves-Rayleigh waves and love waves-Study of earth by seismic waves-Earthquake seismology-Horizontal and vertical seismograph-Seismograph equation-Internal structure of earth..

UNIT 3 EARTHQUAKES AND GRAVITY 9 Hrs. Earthquakes: Focus, Magnitude, Frequency–Detection and prediction–Gravity–Absolute and relative measurements of gravity-Worden gravimeter-Application of gravity methods.

UNIT 4 GEOMAGNETISM 9 Hrs. Geomagnetism-Definitions, magnetic field,-Measurements Proton precession magnetometer, Alkali vapour magnetometer–Theory of Earth magnetism-Dynamo theory of earth magnetism-Magnetic surveying-application.

UNIT 5 GEOCHRONOLOGY AND GEOTHERMAL PHYSICS 9 Hrs.

Geochronology-Radioactivity of the earth-Radioactive dating of rocks and minerals-Geological time scale Geothermal Physics: Flow of heat to the surface of earth–Sources of heat within earth--Process of heat transport-Internal temperature of earth..

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Cook,A.H., “Physics of the Earth and Planets”, I Ed, McMillan Press, London ,1973

2. William Lourie, “Fundamentals of Geophysics”, II Ed, Cambrige University Press, 1982

3. Garland .G.D., “Introduction to Geophysics”, 11 Ed, WB Saunder Company, London.1979

4. Ramachandra Rao M.B., “Out lines of Geophysical prospecting-A manual for Geologists”, Prasaranga University of Mysore, Mysore, 1975

5. Telford, W.M. Geldart, L. P. Sheriff R.E. and Keys .D.A., “Applied Geophysics:, Oxford–IBH Publishing Co.Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi. 1976

6. Rama Rao.B.S., Murthy I.V.R., “Gravity and magnetic methods of prospecting”, Arnold Heinemann Publishers, New Delhi, 1978

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks - 80 Marks

Page 123: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 137 REGULATIONS 2015

SPH1603 SPACE PHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

x To provide the Windows to the Universe, Solar System, and Planetary Atmospheres and also to expose the students to the instruments related with space physics.

UNIT 1 ASTRONOMY FUNDAMENTALS, TELESCOPES FOR ASTRONOMY 9 Hrs.

Radiation from space, radiation laws, Basic terminology used in astronomy, Introduction to the various types of astronomy: optical, radio, IR, UV, X-ray, γ ray, Gravitational etc. Introduction to Optical, IR, X ray, γ ray telescopes, brief description of the various instruments.

UNIT 2 RADIO TELESCOPES AND RECEIVERS 9 Hrs. Antennas, Types of interferometers, array, Radio telescopes of the world including GMRT, OOTY, PRL, Radio telescope receivers, total power receiver, Dicke receiver, correlation receiver, noise temperature. Noise sources.

UNIT 3 SOLAR SYSTEM, TERRESTRIAL AND JOVIAN PLANETS 9 Hrs.

Origin of solar system, occurrence of planetary systems, celestial mechanics, properties of the sun. Orbital and physical characteristics, atmosphere, Studies of Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus, Neptune and their moons. Recent explorations of various planets..

UNIT 4 SCINTILLATION, PLASMA, IONIZATION 9 Hrs.

Interplanetary scintillation, interstellar scintillation, methods for probing solar wind, use of IPS in measurement of solar wind, study of irregularities in the interplanetary medium, properties of plasma at different distances from earth, photoionisation, cosmic ray ionization, meteoric ionization, various resonances in plasma, various waves in plasma, measurement procedures.

UNIT 5 DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUES FOR PROBING IONOSPHERE 9 Hrs.

Radio wave propagation in absence and presence of magnetic field, Formation of Chapman layer, Appleton Hartree equation and its explanation, propogation of radio waves at different frequencies. Ground based, balloon based, space based techniques, Ionosonde, air glow, P.R.Radar, radio scintillation, magnetometer, Langmuir probe, electrostatic analyzer, mass spectrometer, radiosonde.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Glasstone. Van Nostrand, “Sourcebook on the Space Sciences”, Princeton, N.J., 1965

2. John Daniel Kraus Cygnus, “Radio Astronomy: Quasar Books”; 2nd edition, 1986

3. W.N.Christiansen & J.A.Hogbom, “ Radiotelescopes, Radio Telescopes”, 1st edition, Cambridge University Press 1969

4. H.Karttunem, P.Kroger, H.Oja, M.Poutanen, K.J.Donner, “Fundamental Astronomy”, Springer-Verlag; 2nd edition, 1994

5. N.Henbest, M.Marten, “The new Astronomy”, Cambridge University Press, 1996

6. S.K.Alurkar, ”Solar and Interplanetary Disturbances”, World Scientific Publishing Company, 1997.

7. J.A.Ratcliffe, “An introduction to ionosphere and magnetosphere”, Cambridge : Cambridge University Press, 1972

8. A.Giraud, M.Petit, “Ionosphere techniques and phenomena”, First Edition, D. Reidel Pub Co, 1978.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks

Page 124: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 138 REGULATIONS 2015

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 125: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 139 REGULATIONS 2015

SPH1604 ASTROPHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To provide qualitative description of interesting astronomical aspect and evolution of structures in the Universe.

UNIT 1 GRAVITY 9 Hrs.

Newtonian gravity and basic potential theory, Simple orbits – Kepler’s laws and precession, flat rotation curve of galaxies and implications for dark matter, virial theorem and simple applications, role of gravity in different astrophysical systems,.

UNIT 2 RADIATIVE PROCESSES 9 Hrs. Overview of radiation theory and Larmor formula, Different radiative processes : Thomson and Compton

scattering, Bremsstrahlung, Synchrotron [detailed derivations are not expected] Radiative equilibrium, Planck spectrum and properties; line widths and transition rates in QT of radiation, qualitative description of which radiative processes contribute in which waveband/ astrophysical system, distribution function for photons and its moments, elementary notion of radiation transport through a slab, concept of opacities.

UNIT 3 GAS DYNAMICS 9 Hrs.

Equations of fluid dynamics; equation of state in different regimes [including degenerate systems]; Models for different systems in equilibrium, Application to White dwarfs/Neutron stars, Simple fluid flows including supersonic flow, example of SN explosions and its different phases.

UNIT 4 STELLAR SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Basic equations of stellar structure, Stellar energy sources; qualitative description of numerical solutions for stars of different mass, homologous stellar models, Stellar evolution, Evolution in the HR-Diagram.

UNIT 5 GALACTIC DYNAMICS 9 Hrs. Milky Way Galaxy, Spiral and Elliptical galaxies, Galaxies as self gravitating systems; spiral structure, Supermassive black holes, Active galactic nuclei.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Bradley W. Carroll, D.A.Ostlie, “Modern Astrophysics”, Addison-Weseley, 1996.

2. Frank H. Shu,”The physical universe: An Introduction to Astronomy”, University Science books, 1982.

3. Frank H. Shu, “The Physics of Astrophysics”, Volume I and II, University Science books, 2010.

4. T. Padmanabhan, “Theoretical Astophysics”, Volumes I, II and III, Cambridge University Press; First edition, 2001.

5. Arnab Rai Choudhuri, “The Physics of fluids and plasmas”, Cambridge University Press, 1998.

6. Martin. Harwitt, “Astrophysical concepts”, 3rd edition, Springer Science & Business Media, 1998.

7. James Binney & Michael Merrifield, “Galactic Astronomy”, Princeton University Press, 1998.

8. James Binney & Scott Tremaine, “Galactic dynamics”, 2nd edition, Princeton University Press, 2008.

9. A. K. Kembhavi and J. V. Narlikar, “Quasars and Active Galactic Nuclei”, Cambridge University Press, 1999.

10. Bradley M. Peterson, “An Introduction to Active Galactic Nuclei”, Cambridge University Press, 1997.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

Page 126: PROGRAMME: B.E. (PART T I M E ) ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM · 2018-05-17 · ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Sl. No. COURSE CODE 1. SMT1108

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech PART TIME 140 REGULATIONS 2015

SPH1605 ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE x To enable the students understand the laws that govern the structure and properties of the atom, molecules and the nucleus. Also to provide an introduction to the elementary particles.

UNIT 1 IONS, ELECTRONS AND ATOMIC STRUCTURE 9 Hrs. Detection of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields-Dunnigton's method for e/m-positive ray analysis:

Thomson's parabola method-Bohr's atom model-Sommerfeld's relativistic atom model-the Vector atom model and the quantum numbers-comparison with quantum model. Coupling schemes: L-S coupling and j-j coupling–Pauli’s exclusion principle-Magnetic moment due to (i) orbital motion of the electron (ii) due to spin-Stern and Gerlach experiment

UNIT 2 ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR SPECTRA 9 Hrs. Spin-orbit interaction in atomic spectra-fine structure and sodium doublet-Zeeman effect: experiment-classical

result-Quantum mechanical explanation-anomalous Zeeman effect-Paschen Back effect-Stark effect (qualitative) Origin of a pure rotational spectra of a rigid linear molecule-vibrating diatomic molecule as a quantum harmonic oscillator-pure vibrational spectra-Spectroscopy (Schematic): Ultraviolet-Infrared-absorption-Raman.

UNIT 3 PROPERTIES OF NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY 9 Hrs. Isobars, isotopes, mirror nuclei-Nuclear mass and binding energy-Parity-Nuclear spin–Mass defect and packing

fraction-Stable nuclei–Nuclear size, nuclear magnetic moment-Electric quadrapole moment-Nuclear energy levels. Radioactivity: Range and stopping power of alpha particles.-Geiger-Nuttal law-Feature of alpha decay Tunnelling–Beta ray spectrum-Energetic of beta decay-Detection of neutrino-Gamma ray absorption in matter.

UNIT 4 NUCLEAR MODELS, FISSION AND FUSION 9 Hrs. Neutron: Discovery, Mass, Half life, Magnetic Moment, sources and detection–Shell model, Liquid drop

theory-Nuclear fission–Spontaneous fission and potential barrier-Self sustaining Chain Reaction–Neutron balance in Nuclear Reactor-Uncontrolled chain reaction-Nuclear Fusion–radiation hazards and safety measures-Controlled fusion-Fusion in stars..

UNIT 5 ELEMENTARY PARTICLE PHYSICS 9 Hrs. Discovery of cosmic rays-primary and secondary rays-cosmic ray showers-discovery of positron–the mesons–

origin of cosmic rays-the Big-Bang theory-thermal history of the Universe-Hubble’s law–the future of the universe-dark matter. Particles and anti-particles-antimatter-the fundamental interactions–elementary–particle quantum numbers–conservation laws and symmetry–the Quark model–quantum chromodynamics-the standard model– unification of interactions–Grand unified theories. (Qualitative).

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. R.Murugeshan and Kiruthiga Sivaprasath, “Modern Physics” 14thEd, S.Chand and Company Ltd, 2009

2. A.B. Gupta and Dipak Ghosh, “Atomic and Nuclear Physics”, Books and Allied(P)Ltd, Calcutta, 1997

3. Ronald Gautreau and William Savin, “Modern Physics, Schaum’s outline series, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw Hill P.Ltd, 2004 4. K.Gopla Krishnan, Atomic and Nuclear Physics”, 3rd Ed. ,MacMillan India Ltd. 1994

5. H.S.Mani and Mehta ( G.K) , “Introduction to Modern Physics”, Affiliated EWast-West Press, 1989

6. R.P.Feynmann, R.B. Leighton and M.Sands , “The Feynmann Lectures on Physics”, Vol III, 7 th Indian reprint, Narosa Pub. Ltd, 1992

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks